2009-11-24 17:27:59 +01:00
// **********************************************************************
// NOTE: the sections are not ordered by their logical order to avoid
// reshuffling the file each time the index order changes (i.e., often).
// Run the fixnavi.pl script to adjust the links to the index order.
// **********************************************************************
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
/*!
\contentspage{index.html}{Qt Creator}
\page index.html
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\nextpage creator-overview.html
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\title Qt Creator Manual
2010-05-14 15:45:43 +02:00
\section1 Version 2.0 (Beta)
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
Qt Creator provides integrated tools for both application designers
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
and developers to create applications for multiple desktop and mobile device
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
platforms.
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
For application designers, Qt Creator provides two integrated
visual editors, \QD and \QMLD, that you can use to design and develop
application user interfaces.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
For application developers,
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
Qt Creator provides a cross-platform, complete integrated development
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
environment (IDE) that is available for Linux,
Mac OS X and Windows operating systems. For more information, see
2010-02-25 16:33:38 +05:30
\l{Operating Systems and Supported Platforms}.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2009-08-28 19:10:57 +02:00
\note Please report bugs and suggestions to the
2009-10-28 14:36:28 +01:00
\l{http://bugreports.qt.nokia.com}{Qt Bug Tracker}.
2009-08-28 19:10:57 +02:00
You can also join the Qt Creator mailing list. To subscribe,
send a message with the word \e subscribe to
\l{mailto:qt-creator-request@trolltech.com}
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
{qt-creator-request@trolltech.com}. For more information about Qt mailing
2009-08-28 19:10:57 +02:00
lists, visit \l{http://lists.trolltech.com}{http://lists.trolltech.com}.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2009-08-31 16:16:37 +02:00
\raw HTML
<img border="0" style="float:right;" src="images/qtcreator-screenshots.png" />
2009-11-23 12:55:07 +01:00
\endraw
2009-08-31 16:16:37 +02:00
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\list
2010-02-17 12:10:49 +01:00
\o \l{Introducing Qt Creator}
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o \l{Operating Systems and Supported Platforms}
\o \l{Quick Tour}
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
\o \l{Getting Started}
\list
2010-04-07 15:05:31 +02:00
\o \l{Creating a Qt C++ Application}
\o \l{Creating a Qt Quick Application}
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
\endlist
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o \l{Using the Editor}
\list
\o \l{Finding and Replacing}
\o \l{Refactoring}
\o \l{Searching With the Locator}
2010-05-18 15:20:04 +02:00
\o \l{Pasting and Fetching Code Snippets}
\o \l{Configuring the Editor}
\o \l{Using FakeVim Mode}
\o \l{Using an External Editor}
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\endlist
\o \l{Managing Projects}
\list
\o \l{Creating a Project}
\o \l{Setting Up a qmake Project}
\o \l{Setting Up a CMake Project}
\o \l{Setting Up a Generic Project}
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\o \l{Setting Up Development Environment for Maemo}
\o \l{Setting Up Development Environment for Symbian}
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o \l{Managing Sessions}
\endlist
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
\o \l{Building and Running Applications}
\list
\o \l{Building for Multiple Targets}
\o \l{Specifying Build Settings}
\o \l{Specifying Run Settings}
\o \l{Specifying Editor Settings}
\o \l{Specifying Dependencies}
\endlist
2010-03-23 17:33:24 +01:00
\o \l{Developing Qt Quick Applications}
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\o \l{Optimizing Applications for Mobile Devices}
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
\o \l{Using the Maemo Emulator}
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o \l{Debugging}
2010-04-28 16:20:24 +02:00
\list
\o \l {Debugging Qt Applications}
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\list
\o \l{Debugging the Example Application}
\o \l{Interacting with the Debugger}
\o \l{Setting Up Debugger}
\o \l{Using Debugging Helpers}
\endlist
2010-04-28 16:20:24 +02:00
\o \l{Debugging Qt Quick Applications}
\list
\o \l{Using the QML Inspector}
\endlist
\endlist
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o \l{Using Version Control Systems}
2010-03-01 14:42:51 +01:00
\o \l{Adding Qt Designer Plugins}
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o \l{Tips and Tricks}
\o \l{Keyboard Shortcuts}
\o \l{Known Issues}
\o \l{Glossary}
\o \l{Acknowledgements}
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\endlist
*/
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
/*!
\contentspage index.html
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\previouspage index.html
2010-02-17 12:10:49 +01:00
\page creator-overview.html
\nextpage creator-os-supported-platforms.html
\title Introducing Qt Creator
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
Qt Creator provides you with tools to design and develop user interfaces and
complex applications for multiple desktop and mobile
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
platforms.
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
\section1 Designing User Interfaces
Qt Creator provides two integrated visual editors, \QD and \QMLD.
\QD is a tool for designing and building graphical user interfaces (GUIs) from
Qt widgets. You can compose and customize your widgets or dialogs and test
them using different styles and resolutions.
Widgets and forms created with \QD are integrated seamlessly with programmed code,
using the Qt signals and slots mechanism, that lets you easily assign behavior to
graphical elements. All properties set in \QD can be changed dynamically within the code.
Furthermore, features like widget promotion and custom plugins allow you to use your
own widgets with \QD.
UIs that use widgets are clearly structured and enforce a platform look and feel,
which makes them useful for traditional applications. However, they are static, and
do not fully make use of the large high-resolution screens, touch input, and significant
graphics power that are becoming common in portable consumer devices, such as mobile
phones, media players, set-top boxes, and netbooks.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\QMLD allows you to easily develop animations by using a declarative programming
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
language called \l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/declarativeui.html}{QML}.
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
In QML, a user interface is specified as a tree of objects with properties.
You use a visual editor to create items, screens, and applications, as well as define changes
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
in their state. \QMLD generates the necessary code for you.
2010-04-12 17:07:25 +02:00
\note The visual \QMLD editor is provided as an experimental plugin that you must
enable to be able to edit QML files in the \gui Design mode. Enabling the
visual editor can negatively affect the overall stability of Qt Creator.
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
You can edit the code in the code editor to add transitions from one state to another,
and interaction to specify user actions that change the states. You
2010-04-12 17:07:25 +02:00
can use Qt or JavaScript to implement the application logic.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
\section1 Coding Applications
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
2010-02-17 12:10:49 +01:00
As an IDE, Qt Creator differs from a text editor in that it knows how to build and run
applications. It understands the code as code, not just as plain text. This allows
it to:
\list
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\o Enable you to write well formatted code
\o Anticipate what you are going to write and complete the code
\o Display inline error and warning messages
\o Enable you to semantically navigate to classes, functions, and symbols
\o Provide you with context-sensitive help on classes, functions, and symbols
2010-02-18 16:25:42 +01:00
\o Rename symbols in an intelligent way, so that other symbols with the same name
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
that belong to other scopes are not renamed
\o Show you the locations in code where a function is declared or called
2010-02-17 12:10:49 +01:00
\endlist
\section1 Why Do You Need Projects?
To be able to build and run applications, Qt Creator needs the same
information as a compiler would need. This information is specified in the
project build and run settings.
Creating a project allows you to:
\list
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\o Group files together
\o Add custom build steps
\o Include forms and resource files
\o Specify settings for running applications
2010-02-17 12:10:49 +01:00
\endlist
You can either create a project from scratch or import an existing
project. Qt Creator generates all the necessary files, depending on the type of
project you create. For example, if you choose to create a graphical user
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
interface (GUI) application, Qt Creator generates an empty .ui file
that you can modify with the integrated \QD.
2010-03-23 17:33:24 +01:00
If you choose to create a Qt Quick application, Qt Creator generates a .qml file
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
that you can modify with the \QMLD visual editor and the code editor.
2010-02-17 12:10:49 +01:00
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-overview.html
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\page creator-os-supported-platforms.html
\nextpage creator-quick-tour.html
\title Operating Systems and Supported Platforms
\section1 Operating Systems
Qt Creator is available in binary packages for the following operating
systems:
\list
\o Windows XP Service Pack 2
\o Windows Vista
2010-04-29 12:36:15 +02:00
\o (K)Ubuntu Linux 7.04 (32-bit and 64-bit) or later, with the following:
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\list
\o g++
\o make
\o libglib2.0-dev
\o libSM-dev
\o libxrender-dev
\o libfontconfig1-dev
\o libxext-dev
\o libfreetype6-dev
\o libx11-dev
\o libxcursor-dev
\o libxfixes-dev
\o libxft-dev
\o libxi-dev
\o libxrandr-dev
2010-03-12 16:10:22 +01:00
\o If you are using QtOpenGL, libgl-dev and libglu-dev
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\endlist
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\o Mac OS 10.5 or later with the following:
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\list
\o Xcode tools for your Mac OS X version available from your Mac
OS X installation DVDs or at \l http://developer.apple.com.
\endlist
\endlist
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\omit ## Are the Xcode tools still needed separately? \endomit
\section1 Build Environment
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
To build Qt Creator itself from the source, you need:
\list
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\o Qt 4.7 or later
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o On Windows, MinGW 4.4 or Microsoft Visual Studio 2008
\endlist
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\section1 Supported Mobile Device Platforms
You can develop applications for the following mobile device
platforms:
\list
\o Symbian
\o Maemo and Maemo Application Development and Debugging Environment (MADDE)
\endlist
The following table summarizes operating system support for building
applications for mobile device platforms.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\table
\header
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\o {1,3} Operating system
\o {3,1} Platform
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\header
\o Desktop
\o Symbian
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\o Maemo
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\row
\o Windows
\o Yes
\o Yes
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\o Yes
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\row
\o Linux
\o Yes
\o No
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\o Yes
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\row
\o Mac OS X
\o Yes
\o No
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\o No
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\endtable
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-os-supported-platforms.html
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\page creator-quick-tour.html
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
\nextpage creator-getting-started.html
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\title Quick Tour
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
The figure below shows some of the components of Qt Creator in
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\gui{Edit} mode.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\image qtcreator-breakdown.png
2010-05-07 17:31:32 +02:00
Qt Creator has been localized into several languages. If the system language
is one of the supported languages, it is automatically selected. To change
the language, select \gui {Tools > Options > Environment} and select a language
in the \gui Language field. The change takes effect after you restart Qt Creator.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section1 Qt Creator Modes
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
The mode selector allows you to quickly switch between tasks such as
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
editing project and source files, designing application UIs,
configuring how projects are built and
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
executed, and debugging your applications. To change modes, click the
icons, or use the \l{keyboard-shortcuts}{corresponding keyboard shortcut}.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\list
2010-02-25 16:33:38 +05:30
\o \gui Welcome mode for opening recent sessions and projects.
\o \gui{\l{Using the Editor}{Edit}} mode for editing project and source files.
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
\o \gui{\l{Developing Application UI}{Design}} mode for designing and developing
application user interfaces.
2010-02-25 16:33:38 +05:30
\o \gui{\l{Debugging}{Debug}} mode for inspecting the state of your program while
debugging.
\o \gui{\l{Managing Projects}{Projects}} mode for configuring project building and
execution.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\o \gui{\l{Getting Help}{Help}} mode for viewing Qt documentation.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\endlist
2010-03-18 13:08:45 +05:30
Certain actions in Qt Creator trigger a mode change. Clicking on
\gui {Debug} > \gui {Start debugging} > \gui {Start debugging}
2010-02-25 16:33:38 +05:30
automatically switches to \gui {Debug} mode.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\section1 Browsing Project Contents
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
Use the sidebar to browse files, projects and bookmarks.
\image qtcreator-sidebar.png
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
You can select the content of the sidebar in the sidebar menu:
\list
\o \gui Projects shows a list of projects open in the current
session.
\o \gui{File System} shows the content of the currently selected
directory.
\o \gui Bookmarks shows all bookmarks for the current session.
\o \gui{Open Documents} shows currently open files.
\endlist
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
You can change the view of the sidebar in the following ways:
\list
\o To toggle the sidebar, click \inlineimage qtcreator-togglebutton.png
or press \key Alt+0 (\key Cmd+0 on Mac OS X).
\o To split the sidebar, click \inlineimage qtcreator-splitbar.png
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
. Select new content to view in the split view.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o To close a sidebar view, click
\inlineimage qtcreator-closesidebar.png
.
\endlist
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\section2 Viewing Project Files
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-18 13:08:45 +05:30
The sidebar displays projects in a project tree. The project tree contains
a list of all projects open in the current session. The files for each
project are grouped according to their file type.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
You can use the project tree in the following ways:
\list
2010-03-18 13:08:45 +05:30
\o To bring up a context menu containing the actions most commonly
needed right-click an item in the project tree.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
For example, through the menu of the project root directory you can,
2010-03-18 13:08:45 +05:30
among other actions, build, re-build, clean and run the project.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o To list all files in a project, click
\inlineimage qtcreator-filter.png
2010-03-18 13:08:45 +05:30
and select \gui{Simplify tree}.
\o To hide source files which are automatically generated by the build
system, during a build, click \inlineimage qtcreator-filter.png
and select \gui{Hide generated files}.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o To toggle the synchronization of your project tree with the file
opened in the editor, click
\inlineimage qtcreator-synchronizefocus.png
.
\o To see the absolute path of a file, move the mouse pointer over the
file name.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\endlist
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\section1 Viewing Output
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
The task pane in Qt Creator can display one of the following panes:
2010-03-18 13:08:45 +05:30
\list
\o \gui{Build Issues}
\o \gui{Search Results}
\o \gui{Application Output}
\o \gui{Compile Output}
2010-05-21 11:56:12 +02:00
\o \gui{General Messages}
\o \gui{Version Control}
2010-03-18 13:08:45 +05:30
\endlist
Output panes are available in all \l{Qt Creator modes}{modes}.
2010-05-18 13:24:38 +02:00
Click the name of an output pane to open the pane. To maximize
an open output pane, click the \gui {Maximize Output Pane} button
or press \key {Alt+9}.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-05-21 11:56:12 +02:00
To open the \gui{General Messages} and \gui{Version Control}
panes, select \gui {Window > Output Panes}.
2009-04-01 17:48:05 +02:00
2008-12-11 11:20:25 +01:00
\section2 Build Issues
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
The \gui{Build Issues} pane provides a list of errors and warnings
2010-03-18 13:08:45 +05:30
encountered during a build. The pane filters out irrelevant output from
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
the build tools and presents the issues in an organized way.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-23 13:16:36 +01:00
Right-clicking on a line brings up a context menu with options to copy
the contents and to show a version control annotation view of the
line that causes the error message.
2008-12-11 11:20:25 +01:00
\image qtcreator-build-issues.png
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2009-04-01 17:48:05 +02:00
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\section2 Search Results
2010-03-18 13:08:45 +05:30
The \gui{Search Results} pane displays the results for global searches,
for example, searching within a current document, files on disk, or all
projects.
The figure below shows an example search result for all
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
occurrences of \c textfinder within the \c "/TextFinder" directory.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\image qtcreator-search-pane.png
2009-04-01 17:48:05 +02:00
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\section2 Application Output
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
The \gui{Application Output} pane displays the status of a program when
2010-03-18 13:08:45 +05:30
it is executed, and the debug output.
The figure below shows an example output from qDebug().
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\image qtcreator-application-output.png
2009-04-01 17:48:05 +02:00
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\section2 Compile Output
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-18 13:08:45 +05:30
The \gui{Compile Output} pane provides all output from the compiler.
The \gui{Compile Output} is a more detailed version of information
displayed in the \gui{Build Issues} pane.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\image qtcreator-compile-pane.png
2009-01-12 16:29:51 +01:00
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\section1 Getting Help
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-04-01 15:36:23 +02:00
Qt Creator comes fully integrated with Qt documentation and
2010-03-18 13:08:45 +05:30
examples using the Qt Help plugin.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\list
2010-03-18 13:08:45 +05:30
\o To view documentation, switch to \gui Help mode.
\o To obtain context sensitive help, move the text cursor to a Qt class
or function and press \key F1. The documentation is displayed in a
pane next to the code editor, or, if there is not enough vertical
space, in the fullscreen \gui Help mode.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-18 13:08:45 +05:30
\image qtcreator-context-sensitive-help.png
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-03-18 13:08:45 +05:30
\o To select and configure how the documentation is displayed in the
\gui Help mode, select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Help.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\endlist
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section2 Adding External Documentation
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-04-01 15:36:23 +02:00
You can display external documentation in the \gui Help mode.
To augment or replace the documentation that ships with Qt Creator and Qt:
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\list 1
\o Create a .qch file from your documentation.
For information on how to prepare your documentation and create a
.qch file, see
2010-03-12 18:33:46 +01:00
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.6/qthelp-framework.html}{The Qt Help Framework}.
2010-04-01 15:36:23 +02:00
\o To add the .qch file to Qt Creator, select \gui Tools >
2010-03-18 13:08:45 +05:30
\gui Options... > \gui Help > \gui Documentation > \gui Add.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\endlist
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-04-01 15:36:23 +02:00
\section2 Using Documentation Filters
You can filter the documents displayed in the \gui Help mode to find
relevant information faster. Select from a list of filters in the
\gui {Filtered by} field. The contents of the \gui Index and \gui Contents
pane in the sidebar change accordingly.
\image qtcreator-help-filters.png "Help filters"
You can modify the filters to include external documentation, for example,
or you can define your own filters. To construct filters, you can use the
filter attributes that are specified in the documentation. Each document
contains at least one filter attribute. If several documents contain the
same filter attribute, such as \c tools, you can use that attribute to
include all those documents.
To add filters:
\list 1
\o Select \gui {Tools > Options... > Help > Filters > Add}.
\o Enter a name for the filter and press \gui {OK}.
\o In \gui Attributes, select the documents that you want to include
in the filter.
\image qtcreator-help-filter-attributes.png "Help filter attributes"
\o Click \gui OK.
\o In the \gui Help mode, select the filter in the \gui {Filtered by}
field to see the filtered documentation in the sidebar.
\endlist
To modify filters, select a filter in \gui Filters, select the attributes,
and then click \gui Apply.
To remove filters, select them in \gui Filters, and click \gui Remove.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\section1 Navigating with Keyboard
2009-03-24 10:01:00 +01:00
2008-12-12 20:11:04 +01:00
Qt Creator caters not only to developers who are used to using the mouse,
but also to developers who are more comfortable with the keyboard. A wide
range of \l{keyboard-shortcuts}{keyboard} and
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\l{Searching With the Locator}{navigation} shortcuts are available to help
speed up the process of developing your application.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\section1 Developing Application UI
To help you design the user interface of your application, two visual
editors are integrated into Qt Creator:
\list
\o \QD
\o \QMLD
\endlist
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
The integration includes project management and code completion.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\section1 Using Qt Designer
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
Qt Creator automatically opens all .ui files in \QD.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\image qtcreator-formedit.png
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
To change the layout of \QD user interface elements:
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\list 1
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\o Select \gui Tools > \gui{Form Editor} > \gui Views >
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\gui Locked.
When this option is unchecked, you can change the layout.
\o Click the header of an element and drag the element to a new
position.
\endlist
2010-05-07 12:44:05 +02:00
To change \QD properties, select \gui Tools > \gui Options... >
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\gui Designer.
\list
\o Set the class properties and code generation preferences in \gui
{Class Generation}.
\o Set an additional folder for saving templates in \gui{Template
Paths}.
\o Set the grid settings and preview preferences in \gui Forms. To
preview your form with skins, enable \gui{Print/Preview
Configuration} and select your skin. Otherwise default preview
settings are used.
To preview the settings, select \gui Tools > \gui{Form Editor} >
\gui Preview, or press \key Ctrl+Alt+R.
\o To specify embedded device profiles, such as style, font, and screen
resolution, select \gui{Embedded Design}.
\endlist
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
For more information on \QD, see
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/designer-manual.html}{Qt Designer Manual}.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
2010-03-18 13:00:02 +01:00
\section1 Using Qt Quick Designer
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
2010-04-12 17:07:25 +02:00
You can edit .qml files in the visual \QMLD editor or in the
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
code editor.
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
In \gui Projects, double-click a .qml file to open it in the code
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
editor. Then select the \gui {Design} mode to edit the file in the
visual editor.
2010-04-12 17:07:25 +02:00
\note The visual \QMLD editor is provided as an experimental plugin that you must
enable to be able to edit QML files in the \gui Design mode. Enabling the
visual editor can negatively affect the overall stability of Qt Creator.
To enable or disable the \QMLD visual editor, select
\gui {Help > About Plugins... > Qt Quick > QmlDesigner}. You must restart Qt Creator
to enable or disable the visual editor.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\image qmldesigner-visual-editor.png "Visual editor"
Use the visual editor panes to manage your project:
\list
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
\o \gui {Navigator} pane displays the items in the scene. You can
show and hide items to focus on specific parts of the application.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\o \gui {Library} pane displays lists of predefined \gui {Items} and
imported \gui {Resources} that you can use to design applications. The
images and other files that you copy to the project folder appear in the
\gui {Resources} pane.
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
\o \gui {Properties} pane displays the properties of the selected component.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
You can also change the properties in the code editor.
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
\o \gui {State} pane displays the different states of the component. To add
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
states, click the empty slot. Then modify the new state in the editor.
In the code editor, you can see the changes recorded as changes to
the base state.
\endlist
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
*/
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2009-11-23 12:55:07 +01:00
/*!
\contentspage index.html
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
\previouspage creator-qml-application.html
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\page creator-editor-using.html
\nextpage creator-editor-finding.html
2009-01-14 16:02:50 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\title Using the Editor
2009-01-14 16:02:50 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
Qt Creator's code editor is designed to aid you in creating, editing and
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
navigating code. Qt Creator's code editor is fully equipped with syntax
checking, code completion, context sensitive help and in-line error
indicators while you are typing.
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section1 Using the Editor Toolbar
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
The editor toolbar is located at the top of the editor view. The editor
toolbar is context sensitive and shows items relevant to the file currently
open in the editor.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\image qtcreator-editortoolbar-symbols.png
Use the toolbar to navigate between open files and symbols in use:
\list
2010-03-30 13:46:39 +03:00
\o To browse forward or backward through your location history, click
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\inlineimage qtcreator-back.png
and \inlineimage qtcreator-forward.png
.
\o To go to any open file, select it from the \gui{Open files}
drop-down menu.
\o To jump to any symbol used in the current file, select it from the
\gui Symbols drop-down menu.
\endlist
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
When you create or edit forms in a \c{.ui} file, the toolbar contains
Qt Designer specific tools.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section1 Splitting the Editor View
Split the editor view when you want to work on and view multiple files on
the same screen.
\image qtcreator-spliteditorview.png
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
You can split the editor view in the following ways:
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\list
\o To split the editor view into a top and bottom view, select
\gui Window > \gui Split or press \key{Ctrl+E, 2}.
Split command creates views below the currently active editor view.
\o To split the editor view into adjacent views, select
\gui Window > \gui{Split Side by Side} or press
\key{Ctrl+E, 3}.
Side by side split command creates views to the right of the
currently active editor view.
\endlist
To move between split views, select \gui Window >
2010-03-19 18:19:50 +05:30
\gui{Go to Next Split} or press \key{Ctrl+E, O}.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
To remove a split view, place the cursor within the view you want to
remove and select \gui Window > \gui{Remove Current Split} or press
\key{Ctrl+E, 0}. To remove all but the currently selected split view,
select \gui Window > \gui{Remove All Splits} or press \key{Ctrl+E, 1}.
\section1 Highlighting and Folding Blocks
Use block highlighting to visually separate parts of the code that belong
together. For example, when you place the cursor within the braces,
the code enclosed in braces is highlighted.
\image qtcreator-blockhighlighting.png
2010-03-19 18:19:50 +05:30
To enable block highlighting, select \gui Tools > \gui{Options...} >
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\gui{Text Editor} > \gui Display > \gui{Highlight blocks}.
Use the folding markers to collapse and expand blocks of code within
braces. Click the folding marker to collapse or expand a block. In the
figure above, the folding markers are located between the line number and
the text pane.
2010-03-19 18:19:50 +05:30
To show the folding markers, select \gui Tools > \gui{Options...} >
\gui{Text Editor} > \gui Display > \gui{Display folding markers}. This
option is enabled by default.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-18 15:20:04 +02:00
When the cursor is on a brace, the matching brace is animated
by default. To turn off the animation and just highlight the block and
the braces, select \gui {Tools > Options... > Text Editor > Display} and
deselect \gui {Animate matching parentheses}.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-07 14:27:00 +02:00
\section1 Checking Code Syntax
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
As you write code Qt Creator checks code syntax. When Qt Creator spots a
syntax error in your code it underlines it and shows error details when you
move the mouse pointer over the error.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\list
\o Syntax errors are underlined in red.
2010-03-19 18:19:50 +05:30
In the following figure, a semicolon is missing at the end of the
line.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\image qtcreator-syntaxerror.png
\o Semantic errors and warnings are underlined in olive.
In the following figure, the type is unknown.
\image qtcreator-semanticerror.png
\endlist
2009-01-14 16:02:50 +01:00
2010-05-07 14:27:00 +02:00
\section1 Completing Code
Qt Creator understands the code as code, not just as plain text. This
allows it to help you to write well formatted code and to anticipate
what you are going to write and complete the code. The code completion
differs somewhat depending on whether you write Qt code or QML code.
\section2 Completing Qt Code
2009-04-27 15:06:36 +02:00
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
As you write code, Qt Creator provides a list of context-sensitive
suggestions to the statement currently under your cursor.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\image qtcreator-codecompletion.png
2010-05-07 14:27:00 +02:00
To open the list of suggestions at any time, press \key{Ctrl+Space}.
If only one option is available, Qt Creator inserts it automatically.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-03-12 16:10:22 +01:00
When completion is invoked manually, Qt Creator completes the common prefix
of the list of suggestions. This is especially useful for classes with
several similarly named members. To disable this functionality, uncheck
\gui{Autocomplete common prefix} in the code completion preferences.
2010-05-07 14:27:00 +02:00
Select \gui Tools > \gui{Options...} > \gui{Text Editor} > \gui Completion.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-18 15:20:04 +02:00
By default, code completion considers only the first letter case-sensitive.
To apply full or no case-sensitivity, select the option in the
\gui {Case-sensitivity} field.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
The following table lists available types for code completion and icon
used for each.
2009-04-27 15:06:36 +02:00
\table
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\header
\o Icon
\o Description
2009-04-27 15:06:36 +02:00
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/class.png
\i A class
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/enum.png
\i An enum
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/enumerator.png
\i An enumerator (value of an enum)
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/func.png
\i A function
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/func_priv.png
\i A private function
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/func_prot.png
\i A protected function
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/var.png
\i A variable
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/var_priv.png
\i A private variable
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/var_prot.png
\i A protected variable
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/signal.png
\i A signal
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/slot.png
\i A slot
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/slot_priv.png
\i A private slot
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/slot_prot.png
\i A protected slot
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/keyword.png
\i A keyword
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/macro.png
\i A macro
\row
\i \inlineimage completion/namespace.png
\i A namespace
\endtable
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-05-07 14:27:00 +02:00
\section2 Completing QML Code
As you write QML code, Qt Creator suggests properties, IDs, and code
snippets to complete the code. The snippets can consist of multiple
fields that you specify values for. Select an item in the list and press
\key Tab or \key Enter to complete the code. Press \key Tab to
move between the fields and specify values for them.
\image qmldesigner-code-completion.png "Completing QML code"
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-03-24 15:39:28 +05:30
\section1 Using Bookmarks
2010-03-30 13:46:39 +03:00
To insert or delete a bookmark right-click the line number and select
2010-03-24 15:39:28 +05:30
\gui{Toggle Bookmark} or press \key{Ctrl+M}.
\image qtcreator-togglebookmark.png
2010-03-30 13:46:39 +03:00
To go to previous bookmark in the current session, press \key{Ctrl+,}.
2010-03-24 15:39:28 +05:30
2010-03-30 13:46:39 +03:00
To go to next bookmark in the current session, press \key{Ctrl+.}.
2010-03-24 15:39:28 +05:30
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section1 Moving to Symbol Definition or Declaration
In Qt Creator you can move directly to the definition or the declaration of
a symbol by holding the \key Ctrl and clicking the symbol.
2010-03-18 15:13:45 +05:30
To enable this moving function, in \gui Tools > \gui{Options...} >
2010-03-12 16:10:22 +01:00
\gui{Text Editor} > \gui Behavior select \gui{Enable mouse navigation}.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-03-24 15:39:28 +05:30
\section1 Using Update Code Model
To refresh the internal information in Qt Creator pertaining to your code,
2010-05-14 15:45:43 +02:00
select \gui{Tools} > \gui{C++} > \gui{Update Code Model}.
2010-03-24 15:39:28 +05:30
2010-03-30 13:46:39 +03:00
\note In Qt Creator indexing updates the code automatically. Use
2010-05-14 15:45:43 +02:00
\gui{Update Code Model} only as an emergency command.
2010-03-24 15:39:28 +05:30
2010-05-18 15:20:04 +02:00
*/
2010-03-24 15:39:28 +05:30
2010-05-18 15:20:04 +02:00
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-editor-locator.html
\page creator-editor-codepasting.html
\nextpage creator-editor-options.html
\title Pasting and Fetching Code Snippets
2010-03-31 10:19:25 +05:30
2010-03-31 11:19:53 +02:00
In Qt Creator, you can paste snippets of code to a server or fetch
2010-03-31 10:19:25 +05:30
snippets of code from the server. To paste and fetch snippets of code,
Qt Creator uses the following:
\list
\o \gui{CodePaster}
\o \gui{Pastebin.Com}
\o \gui{Pastebin.Ca}
\endlist
2010-03-31 11:19:53 +02:00
To configure the server, select \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...} >
2010-03-31 10:19:25 +05:30
\gui{Code Pasting}.
To paste a snippet of code onto the server, select \gui{Tools} >
\gui{Code Pasting} > \gui{Paste Snippet...} or press \key{Alt+C,Alt+P}.
To fetch a snippet of code from the server, select \gui{Tools} >
\gui{Code Pasting} > \gui{Fetch Snippet...} or press \key{Alt+C,Alt+F}.
2010-03-31 11:19:53 +02:00
\note To use \gui{Pastebin.Com}, configure the domain
2010-03-31 10:19:25 +05:30
prefix in \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...} > \gui{Code Pasting} >
\gui{Pastebin.com}.
2010-03-31 11:19:53 +02:00
For example, you might ask colleagues to review a change that you plan to
2010-05-21 11:56:12 +02:00
submit to a version control system. If you use the Git version control system,
2010-03-31 11:19:53 +02:00
you can create a \e{diff} view by selecting \gui{Tools} > \gui{Git} >
\gui{Diff Repository}. You can then upload its contents to the server by choosing
\gui{Tools} > \gui{Code Pasting} > \gui{Paste Snippet...}. The reviewers can retrieve
the code snippet by selecting \gui{Tools} > \gui{Code Pasting} > \gui{Fetch Snippet...}.
If they have the project currently opened in Qt Creator, they can apply and test
the change by choosing \gui{Tools} > \gui{Git} > \gui{Apply Patch}.
2010-03-31 10:19:25 +05:30
2010-05-18 15:20:04 +02:00
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-editor-options.html
\page creator-editor-fakevim.html
\nextpage creator-editor-external.html
\title Using FakeVim Mode
2010-03-29 13:59:29 +05:30
In the \gui{FakeVim} mode, you can run the main editor in a manner similar
to the Vim editor. To run the editor in the \gui{FakeVim} mode, select
2010-05-14 15:45:43 +02:00
\gui{Edit} > \gui{Advanced} > \gui{Use Vim-style Editing} or press
2010-03-29 13:59:29 +05:30
\key{Alt+V,Alt+V}.
In the \gui{FakeVim} mode, most keystrokes in the main editor will be
2010-05-04 11:28:39 +02:00
intercepted and interpreted in a way that resembles Vim. Documentation for
Vim is not included in Qt Creator. For more information on using Vim,
see \l{http://www.vim.org/docs.php}{Documentation} on the Vim web site.
2010-03-29 13:59:29 +05:30
To map commands entered on the \gui{FakeVim} command line to actions of the
Qt Creator core, select \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...} > \gui{FakeVim} >
\gui{Ex Command Mapping}.
2010-05-18 15:20:04 +02:00
To make changes to the Vim-style settings, select \gui{Tools} >
\gui{Options...} > \gui FakeVim > \gui{General}.
To use a Vim-style color scheme, select \gui {Tools > Options... >
Text Editor > Fonts & Color}. In the \gui {Color Scheme} list, select
\gui {Vim (dark)}.
2010-03-29 13:59:29 +05:30
2010-05-04 11:28:39 +02:00
To quit the FakeVim mode, click \gui {Quit FakeVim} or press
\key{Alt+V,Alt+V}.
2010-05-18 15:20:04 +02:00
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-editor-fakevim.html
\page creator-editor-external.html
\nextpage creator-project-managing.html
2010-03-29 13:59:29 +05:30
2010-05-18 15:20:04 +02:00
\title Using an External Editor
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
To open the file you are currently viewing in an external editor, select
\gui Edit > \gui Advanced > \gui{Open in External Editor}.
To use the external editor of your choice:
\list 1
2010-03-19 18:19:50 +05:30
\o Add the editor path to the \c{PATH} environment variable of your
operating system.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o In Qt Creator select \gui Tools > \gui Options... >
\gui Environment > \gui General.
\o In \gui{External editor} enter the name of the application followed
by \key Space and \tt{\bold %f}. For example, to open the file in
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
Smultron, enter \tt{\bold{smultron %f}}.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
To further define how to open the file in the external editor, you
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
can use the following variables separated by a space:
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\list
\o Current line number \tt{\bold %l}
\o Current column number \tt{\bold %c}
\o Editor's x position on the screen \tt{\bold %x}
\o Editor's y position on the screen \tt{\bold %y}
\o Editor's width in pixels \tt{\bold %w}
\o Editor's height in pixels \tt{\bold %h}
\o Editor's width in characters \tt{\bold %W}
\o Editor's height in characters \tt{\bold %H}
\o To pass % symbol to the editor \tt{\bold %%}
\endlist
\note Not all variables work with all editors.
\endlist
2009-01-14 16:02:50 +01:00
*/
2010-05-18 15:20:04 +02:00
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-editor-codepasting.html
\page creator-editor-options.html
\nextpage creator-editor-fakevim.html
\title Configuring the Editor
Qt Creator allows you to configure the text editor to suit your specific
needs. To configure the editor, select \gui Tools > \gui{Options...} >
\gui{Text Editor}.
You can perform the following configuration actions:
\list
\o Set the font preferences and apply syntax highlighting in
\gui{Font & Colors}.
\o Set tabs, indentation, the handling of whitespace, and mouse operations in
\gui Behavior.
\o Set various display properties, for example,
\l{Highlighting and folding blocks}{highlighting and folding blocks},
text wrapping or \l{Moving to symbol definition or declaration}
{moving to symbol definition or declaration}
in \gui Display.
\o Configure \l{Completing Code}{code completion} in \gui Completion.
\endlist
\section2 Configuring Fonts
You can select the font family and size. You can specify a zoom setting in
percentage for viewing the text. You can also zoom in or out by pressing
\key {Ctrl++} or \key {Ctrl +-}, or by pressing \key Ctrl and rolling
the mouse button up or down. To disable the mouse wheel function, select
\gui {Tools > Options... > Text Editor > Behavior} and deselect the
\gui {Enable scroll wheel zooming} check box.
Antialiasing is used by default to make text look smoother and more
readable on the screen. Deselect the \gui Antialias check box to
turn off antialiasing.
\section2 Defining Color Schemes
You can select one of the predefined color schemes for syntax highlighting
or create customized color schemes. To create a color scheme:
\list 1
\o Select \gui {Tools > Options... > Text Editor > Fonts & Color > Copy}.
\o Enter a name for the color scheme and click \gui OK.
\o In the \gui Foreground field, specify the color of the selected
code element.
\o In the \gui Background field, select the background
color for the code element.
The backgound of the \gui Text element determines the background of the
code editor.
\endlist
When you copy code from Qt Creator, it is copied in both plain text and HTML
format. The latter makes sure that syntax highlighting is preserved when
pasting to a rich-text editor.
\section2 Indenting Code
When you type code, it is indented automatically according to the selected
options. Select a block to indent it when you press \key Tab.
Press \key {Shift+Tab} to decrease the indentation.
When you press \gui Backspace the indentation is decreased by one level,
instead of one space, by default.
By default, the tab-length in code editor is 8 spaces, but you can change
it. The code editor can also determine whether tabs or spaces are used
on the previous or next line and copy the style.
You can determine whether the block indent style includes braces,
or you can use the GNU indent style. The GNU style places braces on a separate
line, indented by 2 spaces, except when they open a function definition, where
they are not indented.
The following code snippet illustrates excluding braces from the indented block:
\code
void foobar(bool zoo)
{
if (zoo)
{
foo();
}
}
\endcode
The following code snippet illustrates including braces in the indented block:
\code
void foobar(bool zoo)
{
if (zoo)
{
foo();
}
}
\endcode
The following code snippet illustrates the GNU style:
\code
void foobar(bool zoo)
{
if (zoo)
{
foo();
}
}
\endcode
*/
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
/*!
\contentspage index.html
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\previouspage creator-editor-using.html
\page creator-editor-finding.html
\nextpage creator-editor-refactoring.html
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\title Finding and Replacing
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
To search through the currently open file:
\list 1
\o Press \key Ctrl+F or select \gui Edit > \gui Find/Replace >
2010-03-19 18:19:50 +05:30
\gui{Find/Replace}.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Enter the text you are looking for.
If the text is found, all occurrences are highlighted as you type.
\o To go to the next occurrence, click \inlineimage qtcreator-next.png
, or press \key F3. To go to the previous occurrence click
\inlineimage qtcreator-previous.png
, or press \key Shift+F3.
\endlist
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-05-07 14:27:00 +02:00
You can restrict the search in the \gui Find field by selecting one
or several search criteria:
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\list
\o To make your search case sensitive, select
\inlineimage qtcreator-editor-casesensitive.png
.
\o To search only whole words, select
\inlineimage qtcreator-editor-wholewords.png
.
\o To search using regular expressions, select
\inlineimage qtcreator-editor-regularexpressions.png
.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
Regular expressions used in Qt Creator are modeled on Perl regular
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
expressions. For more information on using regular expressions, see
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.6/qregexp.html#details}
{Detailed Description} in the QRegExp Class Reference.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\endlist
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\note If you have selected text before selecting \gui Find/Replace, the
search is conducted within the selection.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
To replace occurrences of the existing text, enter the new text in the
2010-05-07 14:27:00 +02:00
\gui{Replace with} field.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\list
\o To replace the selected occurrence and move to the next one,
click \inlineimage qtcreator-next.png
or press \key Ctrl+=.
\o To replace the selected occurrence and move to the previous one,
click \inlineimage qtcreator-previous.png
.
\o To replace all occurrences in the file, click \gui{Replace All}.
\endlist
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section1 Advanced Search
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
To search through projects, files on a file system or the currently open
file:
\list 1
\o Press \key Ctrl+Shift+F or select \gui Edit >
2010-02-25 16:33:38 +05:30
\gui Find/Replace > \gui{Advanced Find} >
\gui{Open Advanced Find...}.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Select the scope of your search:
\list
\o \gui{All Projects} searches files matching the defined file
pattern in all currently open projects.
For example, to search for \tt previewer only in \tt .cpp
and \tt .h files, enter in \gui{File pattern}
\tt *.cpp,*.h.
\image qtcreator-search-allprojects.png
\o \gui{Current Project} searches files matching the defined file
pattern only in the project you are currently editing.
\o \gui{Files on File System} recursively searches files matching
the defined file pattern in the selected directory.
\o \gui{Current File} searches only the current file.
\endlist
\o Enter the text you are looking for and click \gui Search.
\image qtcreator-searchresults.png
A list of files containing the searched text is displayed in the
\gui{Search Results} pane.
\list
\o To see all occurrences in a file, double-click the file name in
the list.
\o To go to an occurrence, double-click it.
\endlist
\endlist
*/
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-editor-finding.html
\page creator-editor-refactoring.html
\nextpage creator-editor-locator.html
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\title Refactoring
2009-11-02 14:16:57 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
Code refactoring is the process of changing the code without modifying the
existing functionality of your application. By refactoring your code you
can:
\list
\o Improve internal quality of your application
\o Improve performance and extensibility
\o Improve code readability and maintainability
\o Simplify code structure
\endlist
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section1 Finding Symbols
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
To find the use of a specific symbol in your project:
\list 1
\o In the editor place the cursor on the symbol and select \gui Tools
2010-03-19 18:19:50 +05:30
> \gui C++ > \gui{Find Usages} or press
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\key Ctrl+Shift+U.
Qt Creator looks for the symbol in the following locations:
\list
\o Files listed as a part of the project
\o Files directly used by the project files (for example, generated
files)
\o Header files of used frameworks and libraries
\endlist
\o The \gui{Search Results} pane opens and shows the location and
number of instances of the symbol in the current project.
\image qtcreator-refactoring-find.png
\endlist
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
You can browse the search results in the following ways:
\list
\o To go directly to an instance, double-click the instance in the
\gui{Search Results} pane.
\o To move between instances, click
\inlineimage qtcreator-forward.png
and
\inlineimage qtcreator-back.png
in the \gui{Search Results} pane.
\o To expand and collapse the list of all instances, click
\inlineimage qtcreator-expand.png
.
\o To clear the search results, click \inlineimage qtcreator-clear.png
.
\endlist
2009-01-16 17:36:17 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section1 Renaming Symbols
2010-05-07 14:27:00 +02:00
The functions used to rename symbols depends on whether you are
writing C++ or QML code. For QML, you can only rename IDs.
To rename a specific symbol in a Qt project:
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\list 1
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o In the editor, place the cursor on the symbol you would like to
change and select \gui Tools > \gui C++ >
2010-03-19 18:19:50 +05:30
\gui{Rename Symbol Under Cursor} or press \key Ctrl+Shift+R.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
The \gui{Search Results} pane opens and shows the location and
number of instances of the symbol in the current project.
\image qtcreator-refactoring-replace.png
\o To replace all selected instances, enter the name of the new symbol
in the \gui{Replace with} text box and click \gui Replace.
To omit an instance, uncheck the check-box next to the instance.
\note This action replaces all selected instances of the symbol in
all files listed in the \gui{Search Results} pane. You cannot
undo this action.
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\endlist
2009-01-14 16:02:50 +01:00
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\note Renaming local symbols does not open the \gui{Search Results} pane.
The instances of the symbol are highlighted in code and you can edit the
symbol. All instances of the local symbol are changed as you type.
2010-05-07 14:27:00 +02:00
To rename an ID in a Qt Quick project:
\list 1
\o Right-click an ID in the QML code and select
\gui {Rename id}.
\o In the \gui {Rename id} field, enter the new ID.
\endlist
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
*/
2009-04-01 17:48:05 +02:00
2009-01-14 16:02:50 +01:00
/*!
\contentspage index.html
2010-05-18 15:20:04 +02:00
\previouspage creator-editor-external.html
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\page creator-project-managing.html
\nextpage creator-project-creating.html
\title Managing Projects
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-25 16:31:06 +01:00
One of the major advantages of Qt Creator is that it allows a team of
developers to share a project across different development platforms with a common
tool for development and debugging.
The recommended way to build a project is to use a \l{Using Version Control Systems} {version control system}.
Store and edit only project source files and the .pro and .pri files (for qmake)
or CMakeLists.txt and *.cmake files (for CMake). Do not store
files generated by the build system or Qt Creator, such as makefiles,
.pro.user, and object files. Other approaches are possible,
but we recommend that you do not use network resources, for example.
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
Qt Creator allows you to specify separate \l{Building for Multiple Targets} {build settings}
2010-04-12 15:18:51 +02:00
for each development platform. By default, \l{glossary-shadow-build}{shadow builds} are used to
2010-03-25 16:31:06 +01:00
keep the build specific files separate from the source.
You can create separate versions of project files to keep platform-dependent
code separate. You can use qmake
\l{http://qt.nokia.com/doc/4.2/qmake-tutorial.html#adding-platform-specific-source-files}{scopes}
to select the file to process depending on which platform qmake is run on.
Items such as open files, breakpoints, and watches are stored in
\l{Managing Sessions}{sessions}. They are not considered to be part of the
information shared across platforms.
Qt Creator is integrated with cross-platform systems for build automation:
qmake and CMake. In addition, you can import generic projects that do not use qmake
or CMake, and specify that Qt Creator ignores your build system.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\list
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\o To use \bold{qmake} to build applications, open a \c .pro file. For more
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
information, see \l{Setting Up a qmake Project}.
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\o To use \bold{CMake} to build applications you need to have CMake version
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2.8.0 or later installed. For more information, see
\l{Setting Up a CMake Project}.
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\o To use \bold{other build systems} to build applications, specify which files belong to
2010-03-25 16:31:06 +01:00
your project and which include directories or defines you want to pass
to your compiler. For more information, see
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\l{Setting Up a Generic Project}.
\endlist
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
Qt Creator provides support for \l{Building and Running Applications}{building and running} Qt applications for
desktop environment and mobile devices. When you install the Nokia Qt SDK,
the build and run settings for the desktop, Maemo, and Symbian targets are set up
automatically. However, you need to install and configure some additional software
on the devices:
\list
\o \l{Setting Up Development Environment for Maemo}.
\o \l{Setting Up Development Environment for Symbian}.
\endlist
\note The only supported build system for mobile applications in Qt
Creator is qmake.
Once your mobile application is ready, you can test it in the Qt Simulator.
You can also connect Maemo and Symbian devices to your development PC and
debug applications on the devices. After you have tested the application,
you can deploy it on mobile devices.
Developing applications for mobile devices is different from developing
desktop applications. For more information, see
\l{Optimizing Applications for Mobile Devices}.
2010-03-24 17:30:47 +05:30
To change the location of the project directory, and to make changes in
the build and run settings, select \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...} >
\gui{Projects} > \gui{General}.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section1 External Libraries
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
Through external libraries Qt Creator can support code completion and
syntax highlighting for external libraries as if they were a part of the
current project or the Qt library.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
The procedure of adding a library to a project depends on the type of
project, which influences the build system used.
2009-11-23 12:55:07 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\list
\o For information on adding external libraries to qmake projects, see
\l{Adding External Libraries to a qmake Project}.
\o For information on adding external libraries to CMake projects, see
\l{Adding External Libraries to a CMake Project}.
\endlist
*/
2009-11-23 12:55:07 +01:00
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-project-managing.html
\page creator-project-creating.html
\nextpage creator-project-qmake.html
2009-11-23 12:55:07 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\title Creating a Project
2009-11-23 12:55:07 +01:00
2010-03-30 17:12:11 +02:00
You use wizards to create and import several types of projects and files, such
as Qt GUI or console applications and Qt Quick applications. You can also use
wizards to add individual files to your projects. For example, you can create
the following types of files:
\list
\o Qt resource files, which allow you to store binary files in the
application executable
\o \QD forms and Qt QML files, which specify parts of application user
interfaces
\o C++ class, source, or header files
\endlist
The wizards prompt you to enter the settings needed
for that particular type of project and create the necessary files for you.
\image qtcreator-new-project.png
\section1 Using Project Wizards
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
To create a new project:
\list 1
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\o Select \gui File > \gui{New File or Project} and select the type of your
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
project.
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
The contents of the following dialogs depend on the project type.
2010-03-30 17:12:11 +02:00
Follow the instructions of the wizard.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
This example uses \gui {Qt Gui Application}.
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Name the project and set its path. To select the path from a
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
directory tree, click \gui Browse.
2009-11-23 12:55:07 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
Avoid using spaces and special characters in the project name and
path.
\image qtcreator-intro-and-location.png
\o Specify the name of the class you want to create and using the
drop-down menu select its base class type.
Note that the \gui{Header file}, \gui{Source file} and
\gui{Form file} fields are automatically updated as you name your
class.
\image qtcreator-class-info.png
\o Review the project settings.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
To create the project, click \gui Finish.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\image qtcreator-new-project-summary.png
\endlist
2010-02-25 16:33:38 +05:30
2010-03-30 17:12:11 +02:00
\section1 Adding New Project Wizards
If you have a team working on a large application or several applications,
you might want to standardize the way the team members create projects
and classes.
You can use the wizard templates in the \c {share/qtcreator/templates/wizards}
folder to create your own project and class wizards. Qt Creator looks in the
folder and adds all wizards defined in wizard.xml files to the \gui New dialog
that opens when you select \gui {File > New File or Project}.
In a project wizard, you can specify the files needed in a project.
You can add wizard pages to allow developers to specify settings for the
projcet.
In a class wizard, you can allow developers to specify the class name, base
class, and header and source files for the class.
To see how this works, rename wizard_example.xml as wizard.xml in the helloworld
and listmodels folders. After you restart Qt Creator, the \gui {Custom Classes}
and \gui {Custom Projects} categories appear in the \gui New dialog.
\image qtcreator-custom-project-wizards.png "The New dialog with custom projects and classes"
\section2 Creating Project Wizards
To create a project wizard:
\list 1
\o Make a copy of the \c {share/qtcreator/templates/wizards/helloworld} or
\c {share/qtcreator/templates/wizards/listmodel} folder.
\o Modify the wizard_example.xml file.
\o The following code determines the type of the wizard and its place
in the \gui New dialog:
\code
<wizard version="1" kind="project"
class="qt4project" firstpage="10"
id="A.HelloWorld" category="B.CustomProjects">
\endcode
\list
\o \c version is the version of the file contents. Do not modify this value.
\o \c kind specifies the type of the wizard: \c project or \c class.
\o \c class specifies the type of the project. Currently the only available
type is \c qt4project, which specifies a Qt console project.
\o \c firstpage specifies the place of the new page in the standard project
wizard. The value 10 ensures that the custom page appears after the standard
pages, as the last page of the wizard.
\o \c id is the unique identifier for your wizard. The letter specifies the
position of the wizard within the \c category. The HelloWorld wizard appears
as the first wizard in the second category in the \gui New dialog.
\o \c category is the category in which to place the wizard in the list.
The letter specifies the position of the category in the list in the \gui New
dialog.
\endlist
\o The following code specifies the icon and text that appear in the \gui New
dialog:
\code
<icon>console.png</icon>
<description>Creates a hello-world-project with custom message.</description>
<description xml:lang="de">Erzeugt ein Hello-Welt-Projekt mit einer Nachricht.</description>
2010-04-19 17:17:20 +02:00
<displayname>Hello World</displayname>;
<displayname xml:lang="de">Hallo Welt</displayname>;
<displaycategory>Custom Projects</displaycategory>
<displaycategory xml:lang="de">Benutzerdefinierte Projekte</displaycategory>
2010-03-30 17:12:11 +02:00
\endcode
\list
\o \c icon appears next to the \c displayName.
\o \c description appears at the bottom of the \gui New dialog when you
select the display name.
\o \c displayName appears in the \gui New dialog, under the
\c displayCategory.
You can add translations as values for the text elements. Specify the target
language as an attribute for the element. Use locale names (QLocale).
For example, \c {xml:lang="de"}.
\endlist
\o The following code specifies the files to add to the project:
\code
<files>
2010-04-19 17:17:20 +02:00
<file source="main.cpp" openeditor="true" />
<file source="project.pro" target="%ProjectName%.pro" openproject="true" />
2010-03-30 17:12:11 +02:00
\endcode
\list
\o \c source specifies the file to copy to the project. The files must be
located in the wizard folder.
\o \c target specifies the new filename for the file. The \c {%ProjectName%}
variable is replaced with the string that users specify in the \gui Name
field on the first page of the wizard.
2010-04-19 17:17:20 +02:00
\o \c openproject indicates that the file is a project file which is to be opened
after the wizard has finished.
\o \c openeditor indicates that the file is to be opened in an editor after
the wizard has finished.
2010-03-30 17:12:11 +02:00
\endlist
\o The following code creates a page that specifies settings for the project:
\code
<!-- Create a 2nd wizard page with parameters -->
<fieldpagetitle>Hello World Parameters</fieldpagetitle>
<fieldpagetitle xml:lang="de">Hallo Welt Parameter</fieldpagetitle>
<fields>
<field mandatory="true" name="MESSAGE">
<fieldcontrol class="QLineEdit" validator='^[^"]+$' defaulttext="Hello world!" />
<fielddescription>Hello world message:</fielddescription>
<fielddescription xml:lang="de">Hallo-Welt-Nachricht:</fielddescription>
</field>
</fields>
\endcode
\list
\o \c fieldpagetitle specifies the title of the page.
\o \c field specifies whether the field is mandatory (\c true or \c false).
You can use the value of the \c name field as a variable in other files (for
example, \c {%MESSAGE%}.
\o \c fieldcontrol specifies the field. \c class specifies the field type.
You can use interface objects from the QWidget class to create fields. This
example uses QLineEdit to create an input field.
\o \c validator specifies a regular expression to check the characters allowed in
the field.
\o \c defaulttext specifies text that appears in the field by default.
\o \c fielddescription specifies the field name that appears on the wizard page.
\endlist
\endlist
\section2 Creating Class Wizards
The widget.xml file for a class wizard is very similar to that for a project
wizard. The differences are discussed below.
To create a class wizard:
\list 1
\o The following code specifies settings for the wizard:
\code
<wizard version="1" kind="class" id="A.ListModel" category="B.CustomClasses">
<description>Creates a QAbstractListModel implementation.</description>
<description xml:lang="de">Erzeugt eine Implementierung von QAbstractListModel.</description>
2010-04-19 17:17:20 +02:00
<displayname>QAbstractListModel implementation</displayname>
<displayname xml:lang="de">Implementierung von QAbstractListModel</displayname>
2010-03-30 17:12:11 +02:00
2010-04-19 17:17:20 +02:00
<displaycategory>Custom Classes</displaycategory>
<displaycategory xml:lang="de">Benutzerdefinierte Klassen</displaycategory>
2010-03-30 17:12:11 +02:00
\endcode
For more information about the elements and their values, see
\l {Creating Project Wizards}.
\o The following code specifies the files to add to the project:
\code
<files>
2010-04-19 17:17:20 +02:00
<file source="listmodel.cpp" target="%ClassName:l%.%CppSourceSuffix%" openeditor="true" />
<file source="listmodel.h" target="%ClassName:l%.%CppHeaderSuffix%" openeditor="true" />
2010-03-30 17:12:11 +02:00
</files>
\endcode
Here, \c target contains the following variables that are used to construct
the filename:
\list
\o \c {%ClassName:l%} is replaced with the value of the \c ClassName field.
The modifier \c l converts the string to lower case, to observe Qt
conventions.
\o \c {%CppSourceSuffix%} is replaced by the default source suffix, which
2010-05-07 12:44:05 +02:00
is defined in Qt Creator in \gui {Tools > Options... > C++ > File Naming}.
2010-03-30 17:12:11 +02:00
For example, if users enter \bold MyClass, the filename becomes myclass.cpp
when the project is created.
\o \c {%CppHeaderSuffix%} is replaced by the default header suffix, which
is also defined in \gui {File Naming}. Here, the filename would
become myclass.h.
\endlist
\o The following code creates a page that allows users to select the class
name, base class, and header and source files for the class:
\code
<!-- Create parameter wizard page -->
<fieldpagetitle>ListModel parameters</fieldpagetitle>
<fieldpagetitle xml:lang="de">Parameter des ListModel</fieldpagetitle>
<fields>
<field name="ClassName">
<fieldcontrol class="QLineEdit" validator="^[a-zA-Z0-9_]+$" defaulttext="MyListModel" />
<fielddescription>Class name:</fielddescription>
<fielddescription xml:lang="de">Klassenname:</fielddescription>
</field>
<field name="Datatype">
<fieldcontrol class="QComboBox" combochoices="QString,int" defaultindex="0" />
<fielddescription>Data type:</fielddescription>
<fielddescription xml:lang="de">Datentyp:</fielddescription>
</field>
</fields>
\endcode
In addition to QLineEdit, QComboBox is used in the class wizard to create
a field. \c combochoices specifies the options in the combobox and
\c defaultindex specifies that QString is the default value.
\endlist
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
*/
2008-12-15 14:29:59 +01:00
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
/*!
\contentspage index.html
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\previouspage creator-project-creating.html
\page creator-project-qmake.html
\nextpage creator-project-cmake.html
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\title Setting Up a qmake Project
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-25 16:31:06 +01:00
The qmake tool helps simplify the build process for development projects
across different platforms. qmake automates the generation of makefiles
so that only a few lines of information are needed to create each makefile.
qmake can be used for any software project, whether it is written in Qt or not.
The qmake tool generates a makefile based on the information in a project
file that is generated by Qt Creator. It can generate makefiles for MinGW,
Microsoft Visual studio, and CSL ARM in Windows, and GNU Compiler Collection
(GCC) in Linux and Mac OS X.
For more information about qmake, see the
\l{http://qt.nokia.com/doc/4.2/qmake-manual.html}{qmake Manual}.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section1 Selecting the Qt Version
Qt Creator allows you to have multiple versions of Qt installed on
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
your development PC and use different versions for each of your projects.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
If Qt Creator finds \bold qmake in the \c{PATH} environment variable, it uses
that version. The \l{glossary-system-qt}{ qmake version of Qt} is referred
to as \bold{Qt in PATH}. If you intend to use only one version of Qt and it
is already in the \c{PATH} and correctly set up for command line use, you do
not need to manually configure your Qt version.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section2 Windows
To add a Qt version for \bold MinGW:
\list 1
\o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Qt4 >
\gui{Qt Versions}.
\o Click \inlineimage qtcreator-windows-add.png
and enter the name of the version in \gui{Version Name} field.
\o Enter the qmake binary path in the \gui{qmake Location}.
\o Enter the MinGW installation path in the \gui{MinGW Directory}.
\image qtcreator-qt4-qtversions-win-mingw.png
\endlist
To add a Qt version for a \bold{Microsoft Visual C++} compiler:
\list 1
\o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Qt4 >
\gui{Qt Versions}.
\o Qt Creator automatically sets the correct environment variables for
compilation. Select the internal version number of the installed
Microsoft Visual C++ tool chains using the \gui MSVC drop-down
box:
\list
\o \bold 7.1 for Visual Studio 2003
\o \bold 8.0 for Visual Studio 2005
\o \bold 9.0 for Visual Studio 2008
\endlist
\note If you are using the
\bold{Windows SDK for Windows Server 2008}, Qt Creator identifies
it as version 9.0.
\image qtcreator-qt4-qtversions-win-msvc.png
\endlist
If you are using \bold{Qt for Symbian} and your S60 SDK is registered
with devices.exe, Qt Creator automatically detects the Qt version. To add a
Qt for Symbian version:
\list 1
\o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Qt4 >
\gui{Qt Versions}.
\o Select the \gui{S60 SDK} you want the Qt Creator to use.
\image qtcreator-qt4-qtversions-win-symbian.png
\o To build an application for your device using GCCE, enter the path
to the \bold{CSL ARM Toolchain} directory in
\gui{CSL\\GCCE Directory}.
You do not need to specify this path if the compiler is included in
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
the \c{PATH} environment variable.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o To build an application for the emulator (WINSCW toolchain), enter
the path to your Carbide C++ installation directory in
\gui{Carbide Directory}.
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
\note You need to have Carbide C++ version 2.0 or later installed.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\endlist
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
\section2 Compiling Projects With Linux
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
To compile a project in Qt Creator, Linux uses GNU Compiler Collection
(GCC). Intel Compiler Collection (ICC) is supported as a drop-in
replacement for GCC.
2009-03-24 10:01:00 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
To add a Qt version:
\list 1
\o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Qt4 >
\gui{Qt Versions}.
\o Click \inlineimage qtcreator-linux-add.png
and enter the name of the version in \gui{Version Name}.
\o Enter the path to the qmake binary in \gui{Path to qmake}.
\endlist
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
\section2 Compiling Projects With Mac OS X
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
To compile a project in Qt Creator, Mac OS X uses GNU Compiler Collection
(GCC), which is part of Xcode.
To add a Qt version:
\list 1
\o Select \gui{Qt Creator} > \gui Preferences... > \gui{Qt Versions}.
\o Click \inlineimage qtcreator-macosx-add.png
and enter the name of the version in \gui{Version Name}.
\o Enter the path to the qmake binary in \gui{Path to qmake}.
\image qtcreator-qt4-qtversions.png
\endlist
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
\section1 Adding External Libraries to a qmake Project
Through external libraries Qt Creator can support code completion and
syntax highlighting as if they were part of the current project or the Qt
library.
To add an external library:
\list 1
\o Open your project file (.pro) using the \gui Projects pane.
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\o Follow the instructions at \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qmake-project-files.html#declaring-other-libraries}
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
{Declaring other Libraries}.
\endlist
Syntax completion and highlighting work once your project successfully
builds and links against the external library.
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
2010-05-18 15:20:04 +02:00
\previouspage creator-project-managing-sessions.html
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\page creator-building-running.html
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
\nextpage creator-building-targets.html
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\title Building and Running Applications
Qt Creator provides support for building and running Qt applications for
desktop environment and mobile devices. When you install the Nokia Qt SDK,
the build and run settings for the desktop, Maemo, and Symbian targets are
set up automatically.
You can select the targets and click the \gui Run button to build and
run the applications on the targets.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\section1 Setting Up a Project
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
To view and modify the settings for currently open projects, switch to the
2010-05-27 16:13:43 +02:00
\gui Projects mode by pressing \key Ctrl+5.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\image qtcreator-projectpane.png
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
The project pane consists of the following tabs:
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\list
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
\o \l{Building for Multiple Targets}{Targets}
\o \l{Specifying Editor Settings}{Editor Settings}
\o \l{Specifying Dependencies}{Dependencies}
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\endlist
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
Use the \gui Build and \gui Run buttons to switch between
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
the build and run settings for the active project.
If you have multiple projects open in Qt Creator, use
\gui{Select a Project} option at the top to navigate between different
project edits.
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-building-running.html
\page creator-building-targets.html
\nextpage creator-build-settings.html
\title Building for Multiple Targets
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
Different build configurations allow you to quickly switch between
different build settings. By default, Qt Creator creates \bold debug
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
and \bold release build configurations.
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
\section1 Building for Desktop
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\list 1
\o Select \gui Desktop as the target.
\o Click the \gui Run button.
\endlist
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
\section1 Building for Qt Simulator
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
You can use the Qt Simulator to test Qt applications that are intended
for mobile devices in an environment similar to that of the device. You
can change the information that the device has about its configuration
and environment.
\list 1
\o Select \gui {Qt Simulator} as the target.
\o Click the \gui Run button.
\endlist
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
For more information about using the Qt Simulator, see the
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/qt-simulator-beta/index.html}{Qt Simulator Manual}.
\section1 Building for Maemo
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\list 1
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\o Build and run the application for \l{Building for Qt Simulator}{Qt Simulator}.
\o Build and run the application for \l{Using the Maemo Emulator}{Maemo Emulator}.
\note The Maemo emulator support requires the Nokia Nokia N900 PR1.2 update.
\o If no problems are found, build and run the application for a device:
\list 1
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\o Set up the MADDE development environment and specify a connection
to the device. For more information, see
\l{Setting Up Development Environment for Maemo}.
\o Connect the device to the development PC.
\o Click the \gui Run button.
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\endlist
\endlist
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
Qt Creator uses the compiler specified in the MADDE toolchain to
build the application.
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
Qt Creator generates an installation package, installs in on the device,
and executes it. The application views are displayed on the Nokia N900.
Command-line
output is visible in the Qt Creator \gui {Application Output} view.
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
Debugging also works transparently.
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\section1 Building for Symbian
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\list 1
\o Build and run the application for \l{Building for Qt Simulator}{Qt Simulator}.
\o If no problems are found, build and run the application for a device.
\o To test functionality that uses Symbian APIs, you can build and
run the application for Symbian Emulator.
\endlist
The build configuration for the \gui{Symbian Device} target
uses the GCCE tool chain by default. If you want to build
for the device using RVCT, select it in the \gui {Tool chain} field
in the \gui{General} section.
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
\section2 Building and Running for a Device
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\list 1
\o Install the required software on the device. For more information, see
\l{Setting Up Development Environment for Symbian}.
\o Connect the device to the development PC through a USB cable.
Qt Creator shows the current connection state
of a device in its main toolbar, showing a red cross when no device is
connected, or a green check mark when a device is connected.
\image qtcreator-qt4-symbian-device-notconnected.png
\image qtcreator-qt4-symbian-device-connected.png
The tool tip of the target button shows more details about the actual
device that will be used when you run your application.
\o Start the \gui{App TRK} application on your device.
\o Click the \gui Run button.
\endlist
You can connect several devices to your development PC simultaneously.
In the details of the run configuration for the \gui{Symbian Device} target,
select the device to run your application on.
\section3 Creating Installation Packages
When you build the application for the \gui{Symbian Device} target, Qt
Creator automatically generates a Symbian installation system (SIS) file
in the project folder. You can deliver the installation file to users for
installation on Symbian devices.
Only installation files signed with a certificate and private key are
allowed to be installed onto Symbian devices. By default, Qt Creator
self-signs the installation file. This self-signing allows you to install
the application on a mobile device but places limits on what you can do
with the installation file, including:
\list
\o Self-signed applications cannot access the more sensitive
\l{Capabilities and Signing}{capabilities} of the mobile device.
\o Security warnings will be displayed when you install the self-signed
application on a mobile device.
\o Self-signed applications cannot be distributed commercially on Ovi
Store.
\endlist
To get around these limitations, you need to go through the Symbian Signed
process. The Symbian Signed organisation manages a public key
infrastructure to provide public authentication of the information in the
application signing certificates. Their security partner can validate your
certificate and give you a Publisher ID. Then, when you sign an
application, other people can be confident that the information in your
certificate is correct and that the application does actually come from you.
There are also options that do not require you to get a Publisher ID. For
more detail about how the Symbian Signed process works, see
\l{http://developer.symbian.org/wiki/index.php/Complete_Guide_To_Symbian_Signed}
{Complete Guide to Symbian Signed}.
When you have your own certificate and private key, you can specify them in
2010-05-14 15:45:43 +02:00
the \gui{Create SIS Package} step in your build configuration.
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\image qtcreator-qt4-symbian-signing.png
\section3 Capabilities and Signing
Capabilities allow the Symbian platform to control access by applications to
the functionality provided by the platform APIs. Access to capabilities is
determined by the device configuration and how the application has been signed.
Symbian Signed offers the following signing options depending on the
capabilities that the application accesses:
\list
\o \bold{Express signed} for applications that access only user and system
capabilities.
\o \bold{Certified signed} for applications that access also restricted or
device manufacturer capabilities.
\note You need to request the rights to access device manufacturer
capabilities from the manufacturer.
\endlist
For more information about how to choose the appropriate signing option, see
\l{http://developer.symbian.org/wiki/index.php/Symbian_Signed_For_Distributing_Your_Application}{Symbian Signed For Distributing Your Application}.
If you select a signing option that does not allow the application to access
the defined capabilities, installing the application on mobile devices
fails. To avoid problems, only define capabilities and link libraries to a project
if you really need them.
For more information about capabilities and how you can check which ones you
need, see
\l{http://developer.symbian.org/wiki/index.php/Capabilities_(Symbian_Signed)}{Capabilities (Symbian Signed)}
and
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/platform-notes-symbian.html#required-capabilities}{Required Capabilities for Qt Applications}.
For more information on how to define capabilities for a project, see
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qmake-platform-notes.html#capabilities}{Capabilities}.
2010-05-19 12:13:38 +02:00
\section3 Application UID
A UID is a globally unique identifier that is used to
uniquely identify, for example, an object or file type. In Symbian development,
objects are identified by compound identifiers that are constructed from three
UIDs, namely UID1, UID2, and UID3. UID1 and UID2 specify the category of an
object, whereas UID3 identifies a particular object, such as an application.
When you create a \gui {Mobile Qt Application}, Qt Creator adds a UID3 suitable for
development and debugging automatically to the application .pro file. However, to
distribute your application and get it Symbian signed, you must apply for a UID
from Symbian, who manages the allocation of UIDs. You can request UIDs either one
at a time or as preallocated blocks on the \l{https://www.symbiansigned.com/app/page}{Symbian Signed}
web site.
Replace the testing UID with the distribution UID in the .pro file before you
build the final installation package. For more information, see
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qmake-platform-notes.html#unique-identifiers}{Unique Identifiers}.
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
\section2 Building and Running for Symbian Emulator
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
Select
the \gui{Symbian Emulator} target as the active one, and build and run your
project.
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
\section2 Troubleshooting
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
If you cannot build the application, check if:
\list
\o You selected the Symbian Device target for building the application.
\o The settings for the Qt version you use to build your project are
correct. The path to the S60 SDK must point to the S60 SDK
installation directory. Select \gui Tools > \gui Options...
> \gui Debugger > \gui{Symbian TRK} and check if it points to the
debugger toolchain.
\endlist
If you cannot run the application on a device, check if:
\list
\o The device is connected through the USB cable in \e{PC Suite} mode.
\o \gui{App TRK} is running on the device, using the USB connection,
with the status \e connected.
\o The device is detected and selected in the run configuration
details.
\endlist
If you cannot run the application in the emulator, check if:
\list
\o You selected the \gui{Symbian Emulator} target for your application.
\o If the emulator process cannot be started, try closing Qt Creator and
starting the application directly from your file manager. Having
done this, Qt Creator should be able to run your projects in the
emulator.
\endlist
If this does not help to solve your problem, search the qt-creator@trolltech.com
mailing list archives or provide feedback to us via the methods described on the
\l{http://qt.gitorious.org/qt-creator/pages/Home}{Qt Creator Development Wiki}.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-building-targets.html
\page creator-build-settings.html
\nextpage creator-run-settings.html
\title Specifying Build Settings
You specify build settings in the \gui Projects mode.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
\image qtcreator-projectpane.png
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
To add a new build configuration, click \gui Add and select the type of
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
configuration you would like to add. You can add as many build
configurations as you need.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
To delete the build configuration currently selected, click \gui Remove.
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
\section1 Editing Build Configurations
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
To edit a build configuration:
\list 1
\o Select the build configuration you want to edit in
\gui{Edit Build Configuration}.
\o In section \gui General, you can specify:
2008-12-16 08:53:01 +01:00
\list
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o The \l{glossary-project-qt}{Qt version} you want to use to
build your project. For more information, see
\l{Selecting the Qt version}.
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\o The tool chain required to build the project.
2010-04-12 15:18:51 +02:00
\o By default, projects are built in a separate directory
from the source directory, as \l{glossary-shadow-build}{shadow builds}.
This keeps the files generated for each target platform separate.
\note Shadow building is not supported by the Symbian build system.
Also, shadow building on Windows is not supported for Maemo.
If you only build for one target platform, you can deselect
the \gui{Shadow Build} checkbox.
2008-12-16 08:53:01 +01:00
\endlist
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\endlist
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
\section1 Build Steps
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
The build system of Qt Creator is built on qmake and make. In
\gui{Build Steps} you can change the settings for qmake and make. Qt
Creator runs the make command using the Qt version defined for the current
build configuration.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
\image qtcreator-build-steps.png "Build steps"
\section1 Clean Steps
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
You can use the cleaning process to remove intermediate files. This process
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
might help you to fix obscure issues during the process of building a
project.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
\image qtcreator-clean-steps.png "Clean steps"
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
You can define the cleaning steps for your builds in the \gui{Clean Steps}:
\list
\o To add a clean step using make or a custom process, click
\gui{Add clean step} and select the type of step you want to add.
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
By default, custom steps are disabled. Activate custom steps by
2010-05-14 15:45:43 +02:00
checking the \gui{Enable custom process step} check-box.
\o To remove a clean step, click \gui{Remove Item}.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o To change the order of steps, click
\inlineimage qtcreator-movestep.png
.
\endlist
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
\section1 Build Environment
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
You can specify the environment you want to use for building in the
\bold{Build Environment} section. By default, the environment in which Qt
Creator was started is used and modified to include the Qt version.
Depending on the selected Qt version, Qt Creator automatically sets the
necessary environment variables. You can edit existing environment
variables or add, reset and unset new variables based on your project
requirements.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-build-settings.html
\page creator-run-settings.html
\nextpage creator-editor-settings.html
\title Specifying Run Settings
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
Qt Creator automatically creates run configurations for your project.
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
To view and modify the settings, select \gui {Projects > Run}.
The settings to specify depend on the type of the project: qmake project
or Qt Quick project.
2010-05-21 12:13:50 +02:00
Click \gui Add to add run settings for a project and \gui Remove to remove
the current settings.
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
\section1 Specifying Run Settings for qmake Projects
The run configurations for qmake projects derive their executable from the parsed .pro
2010-05-28 17:07:44 +02:00
files.
\section2 Specifying Run Settings for Desktop Targets
You can specify command line arguments to be passed to the executable
and the working directory to use. The working directory defaults to
the directory of the build result.
For console applications, check the \gui{Run in Terminal} check box.
If you need to run with special environment variables set up, you
also do it in the run configuration settings.
2008-12-16 12:24:03 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\image qtcreator-pprunsettings.png
2008-12-16 12:24:03 +01:00
2010-05-28 17:07:44 +02:00
You can also create custom executable run configurations where you
can set the executable to be run. For more information, see
\l{Specifying a Custom Executable to Run}.
\section2 Specifying Run Settings for Symbian Devices
Qt Creator automatically detects Symbian devices that are connected to
the development PC with an USB cable.
If only one device is detected, the application is deployed
and run on it. If multiple devices are connected to the PC,
make sure that the correct device is selected in the
\gui {Symbian Device} run settings for your project.
You can also pass command line arguments to your application on the device.
Press the \gui{Device info button} to get more information about the selected
device, such as the CPU type and the running TRK version.
\image qtcreator-symbian-run-settings.png "Run settings for Symbian devices"
\section2 Specifying Run Settings for Maemo Devices
To run an application on a Maemo device, create and select
a device configuration in the Maemo run settings for your project.
You can also pass command line arguments to your application.
\image qtcreator-screenshot-run-settings.png "Run settings for Maemo devices"
\section1 Specifying a Custom Executable to Run
If you use cmake or the generic project type in Qt Creator, or want
to run a custom desktop executable, create a \gui {Custom Executable}
run configuration for your project.
Specify the executable to run, command line arguments, working directory,
and environment variables to use.
\image qmldesigner-run-custom-exe.png "Run settings for custom executables"
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
\section1 Specifying Run Settings for Qt Quick Projects
2010-05-21 12:13:50 +02:00
Select run settings in the \gui {Run configuration} field. The settings
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
are specified automatically and, usually, you do not need to change them:
\list
2010-05-21 12:13:50 +02:00
\o \gui {QML Viewer} is the path to the \QQV executable.
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
2010-05-21 12:13:50 +02:00
\o \gui {QML Viewer arguments} sets arguments for running \QQV.
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
The \c{-I <directory>} argument searches for C++ or QML plugins from
the project folder. For a list of available arguments, enter \c {qml --help}
on the command line.
2010-05-21 12:13:50 +02:00
\o \gui {Main QML file} is the Qt Quick project file.
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
2010-05-21 12:13:50 +02:00
\o \gui {Debugging address} is the IP address to access \QQV.
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
2010-05-21 12:13:50 +02:00
\o \gui {Debugging port} is the port to access \QQV. You can use any
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
free port in the registered port range.
\endlist
\image qmldesigner-run-settings.png "Run settings for Qt Quick projects"
*/
2009-03-24 10:01:00 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-run-settings.html
\page creator-editor-settings.html
\nextpage creator-build-dependencies.html
\title Specifying Editor Settings
To define the default file encoding, select the desired encoding in \gui Projects >
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\gui{Editor Settings}. By default, the Qt Creator uses the file encoding
used by your system.
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
\image qtcreator-editor-settings.png "Editor Settings view"
*/
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-editor-settings.html
\page creator-build-dependencies.html
2010-05-18 15:20:04 +02:00
\nextpage creator-visual-editor.html
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
\title Specifying Dependencies
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
If you have multiple projects loaded in your session, you can define the
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
dependencies between them. Inter-project dependencies affect the build
order of your projects.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
\note Inter-project dependencies are unrelated inside a qmake
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
project.
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
\image qtcreator-build-dependencies.png "Dependencies view"
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
To define the dependencies between projects:
2010-03-23 18:10:17 +05:30
\list 1
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
\o In \gui Projects, select a project.
\o Click \gui Dependencies.
\o Select projects as dependencies.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\endlist
2009-04-01 17:48:05 +02:00
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
*/
2008-12-15 14:29:59 +01:00
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
/*!
\contentspage index.html
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\previouspage creator-quick-tour.html
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
\page creator-getting-started.html
\nextpage creator-writing-program.html
\title Getting Started
This section contains examples that illustrate how to use Qt Creator and the
integrated design tools, \QD and \QMLD, to create simple applications:
\list
2010-04-07 15:05:31 +02:00
\o \l{Creating a Qt C++ Application}
\o \l{Creating a Qt Quick Application}
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
\endlist
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-writing-program.html
\page creator-qml-application.html
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\nextpage creator-editor-using.html
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-04-07 15:05:31 +02:00
\title Creating a Qt Quick Application
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
\note This tutorial assumes that you are familiar with the \l {http://qt.nokia.com/doc/4.7-snapshot/declarativeui.html}
{QML declarative language}.
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
This tutorial describes how to use Qt Creator to create a small animated
2010-04-07 15:05:31 +02:00
Qt Quick application, Hello World.
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
\image qmldesigner-helloworld.png "Hello World"
\section1 Creating the Hello World Project
\note Create the project with the \gui{Help} mode active so that you can follow
these instructions while you work.
\list 1
2010-05-28 15:14:22 +02:00
\o Select \gui{File > New File or Project > Qt Quick Project > Qt QML Application > Choose}.
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
\image qmldesigner-new-project.png "New File or Project dialog"
The \gui{Introduction and Project Location} dialog opens.
\image qmldesigner-new-project-location.png "Introduction and Project Location dialog"
\o In the \gui{Name} field, type \bold {Hello World}.
\o In the \gui {Create in} field, enter the path for the project files. For example,
\c {C:\Qt\examples}, and then click \gui{Next}.
The \gui{Project Management} dialog opens.
\image qmldesigner-new-project-summary.png "Project Management dialog"
\o Review the project settings, and click \gui{Finish} to create the project.
\endlist
The HelloWorld project now contains the following files:
\list
\o HelloWorld.qmlproject
\o HelloWorld.qml
\endlist
\image qmldesigner-new-project-contents.png "HelloWorld project contents"
The .qmlproject file defines that all QML, JavaScript, and image files in
the project folder belong to the project. The .qml file contains some example
code that specifies the screen size (200x200) and a label that contains
the text \bold {Hello World}.
\section1 Designing the User Interface
2010-04-12 17:07:25 +02:00
\list 1
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
2010-04-07 15:05:31 +02:00
\o In the \gui{Edit} mode, double-click the HelloWorld.qml file in
2010-04-12 17:07:25 +02:00
the \gui{Projects} pane to open it in the code editor.
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
2010-04-12 17:07:25 +02:00
\o To set the screen size to that of some Symbian devices in portrait
2010-04-07 15:05:31 +02:00
mode, for example, change the \c width to \bold 240 and \c height to \bold 320.
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
2010-04-07 15:05:31 +02:00
\image qmldesigner-helloworld-screen-size.png "Setting the screen size"
\o Click \gui{Design} to design the UI in the visual editor.
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
2010-04-12 17:07:25 +02:00
\note The visual \QMLD editor is provided as an experimental plugin that you must
enable to be able to edit QML files in the \gui Design mode. Enabling the
visual editor can negatively affect the overall stability of Qt Creator.
\o Restart Qt Creator to enable the visual editor.
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
\o Drag and drop a \gui {Rectangle} from the \gui {Library} pane to the
scene.
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
\image qmldesigner-helloworld-widget-add.png "Add component to Hello World"
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
\o Edit the \gui {Properties} of the component to turn it into a red ball:
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
2010-04-12 17:07:25 +02:00
\list a
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
2010-03-19 17:02:36 +01:00
\o In the \gui {Colors} section, click the color picker to select a red
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
color.
\o In the \gui {Radius} field, use the slider to set the radius value
to \bold 50.
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
\image qmldesigner-helloworld-widget-edit.png "Edit the component"
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
\endlist
\o To create a blue ball, press \key {Ctrl+C} and \key {Ctrl+V} to copy
and paste the red one, and then change its color to blue.
\image qmldesigner-helloworld-base-state.png "Hello World first view"
The first view of your application is now ready.
\note You can use graphical design tools to create nice images and
copy them to the projects folder to display them in the \gui {Library}
pane in \gui {Resources}.
\o In the \gui State pane, click the plus sign to add another view, or \e state
to the application.
\o Modify the state by dragging and dropping the widgets to switch their
places.
\image qmldesigner-helloworld-state1.png "Hello World second view"
\endlist
\section1 Animating the Scene
Animate the scene so that the widgets appear to switch places
on the screen.
\list 1
\o Click \gui {Edit} to open HelloWorld.qml in the code editor.
\o Add the following code to create a transition:
\code
transitions: [
Transition {
NumberAnimation { properties: "x, y"; duration: 500 }
}
\endcode
\note The code editor completes the code for you as you type.
\o Click the \inlineimage qtcreator-run.png
button to check that the application can be built and run.
\endlist
\section1 Adding Interaction
Add interaction to the scene to allow users to click on the screen to start
the animation.
\list 1
\o Click \gui{Design} to open HelloWorld.qml in the visual editor.
\o Drag and drop a \gui {Mouse Area} from the \gui {Library} to the scene.
2010-03-19 17:02:36 +01:00
\o In the \gui {Properties} pane, \gui {Geometry} tab, click the
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
\inlineimage qmldesigner-anchor-fill-screen.png
button to make the mouse region cover the whole screen.
\o In the code editor, use data binding to add a \c when statement to
the states sections, as illustrated by the following code:
\code
states: [
State {
name: "State1"
when: mousearea1.pressed
\endcode
\endlist
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
\section1 Building and Running the Application
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
\list 1
\o Press \key {Ctrl+R} to build and run the application.
\o Click the screen and keep the mouse button pressed down to run the
animation.
\endlist
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
\note In the \gui {QML Viewer}, select \gui {Skin} and select a mobile device
type to view the application as on a mobile device.
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\previouspage creator-build-example-application.html
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
\page creator-writing-program.html
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\nextpage creator-mobile-example.html
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
2010-04-07 15:05:31 +02:00
\title Creating a Qt C++ Application
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\note This tutorial assumes that you have experience in writing basic Qt
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
applications, using \QD to design user interfaces and using the Qt
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
Resource System.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
This tutorial describes how to use Qt Creator
to create a small Qt application, Text Finder. It is a simplified version of the
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
QtUiTools \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/uitools-textfinder.html}{Text Finder}
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
example.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\image qtcreator-textfinder-screenshot.png
\section1 Setting Up Your Environment
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
Qt Creator automatically detects whether the location of Qt is in your \c PATH variable.
If you have installed several Qt versions, follow the
instructions in \l{Selecting the Qt version} to set the Qt path.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
\section1 Creating the Text Finder Project
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\note Create the project with the \gui{Help} mode active so that you can follow
these instructions while you work.
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
\list 1
\o Select \gui{File > New File or Project > Qt Application Project > Qt Gui
2010-05-28 15:14:22 +02:00
Application > Choose}.
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
\image qtcreator-new-project.png "New File or Project dialog"
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
The \gui{Introduction and Project Location} dialog opens.
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\image qtcreator-intro-and-location.png "Introduction and Project Location dialog"
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\o In the \gui{Name} field, type \bold {TextFinder}.
\o In the \gui {Create in} field, enter the path for the project files. For example,
\c {C:\Qt\examples}, and then click \gui{Next}.
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
The \gui{Select Required Qt Versions} dialog opens.
\image qtcreator-new-project-qt-versions.png "Select Required Qt Versions dialog"
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
\o Click \gui{Next} to use the Qt version set in the path in your project.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
The \gui{Class Information} dialog opens.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
\image qtcreator-class-info.png "Class Information dialog"
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\o In the \gui{Class Name} field, type \bold {TextFinder} as the class name.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\o In the \gui{Base Class} list, select \bold {QWidget} as the base class type.
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
\note The \gui{Header File}, \gui{Source File} and
\gui{Form File} fields are automatically updated to match the name of the
class.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
\o Click \gui{Next}.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
The \gui{Project Management} dialog opens.
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
\image qtcreator-new-project-summary.png "Project Management dialog"
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
\o Review the project settings, and click \gui{Finish} to create the project.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
\endlist
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
The TextFinder project now contains the following files:
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\list
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\o textfinder.h
\o textfinder.cpp
\o main.cpp
\o textfinder.ui
\o textfinder.pro
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\endlist
2009-03-24 10:01:00 +01:00
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
\image qtcreator-textfinder-contents.png "TextFinder project contents"
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
The .h and .cpp files come with the necessary boiler plate code.
The .pro file is complete.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\section1 Filling in the Missing Pieces
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
Begin by designing the user interface and then move on to filling
in the missing code. Finally, add the find functionality.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
\section2 Designing the User Interface
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\image qtcreator-textfinder-ui.png "Text Finder UI"
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
\list 1
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\o In the \gui{Editor} mode, double-click the textfinder.ui file in the \gui{Projects}
view to launch the integrated \QD.
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
\o Drag and drop the following widgets to the form:
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\list
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\o \gui{Label} (\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qlabel.html}{QLabel})
\o \gui{Line Edit} (\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qlineedit.html}{QLineEdit})
\o \gui{Push Button} (\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qpushbutton.html}{QPushButton})
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\endlist
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\image qtcreator-textfinder-ui-widgets.png "Adding widgets to Text Finder UI"
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
\o Double-click the \gui{Label} widget and enter the text \bold{Keyword}.
\o Double-click the \gui{Push Button} widget and enter the text \bold{Find}.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-04-08 15:54:32 +02:00
\o In the \gui Properties pane, change the \gui objectName to \bold findButton.
\image qtcreator-textfinder-objectname.png "Changing object names"
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\o Press \key {Ctrl+A} to select the widgets and click \gui{Lay out Horizontally}
(or press \gui{Ctrl+H}) to apply a horizontal layout
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
(\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qhboxlayout.html}{QHBoxLayout}).
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\image qtcreator-texfinder-ui-horizontal-layout.png "Applying horizontal layout"
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\o Drag and drop a \gui{Text Edit} widget (\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qtextedit.html}{QTextEdit})
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
to the form.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\o Select the screen area and click \gui{Lay out Vertically} (or press \gui{Ctr+V})
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
to apply a vertical layout (\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qvboxlayout.html}{QVBoxLayout}).
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\image qtcreator-textfinder-ui.png "Text Finder UI"
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
2010-04-08 15:54:32 +02:00
Applying the horizontal and vertical layouts ensures that the application UI scales to different
screen sizes.
\o To call a find function when users press the \gui Find button, you use the Qt signals
and slots mechanism. A signal is emitted when a particular event occurs and a slot is
a function that is called in response to a particular signal. Qt widgets have predefined
signals and slots that you can use directly from \QD. To add a slot for the find function:
\list
\o Right-click the \gui Find button to open a context-menu.
\o Select \gui {Go to Slot > clicked()}, and then select \gui OK.
A private slot, \c{on_findButton_clicked()}, is added to the header file,
textfinder.h and a private function, \c{TextFinder::on_findButton_clicked()},
is added to the source file, textfinder.cpp.
\endlist
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
\o Press \gui{Ctrl+S} to save your changes.
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\endlist
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
For more information about designing forms with \QD, see the
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/designer-manual.html}{Qt Designer Manual}.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
\section2 Completing the Header File
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
The textfinder.h file already has the necessary #includes, a
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
constructor, a destructor, and the \c{Ui} object. You need to add a private
2010-04-08 15:54:32 +02:00
function, \c{loadTextFile()}, to read and display the
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
contents of the input text file in the
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qtextedit.html}{QTextEdit}.
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
\list 1
\o In the \gui{Projects} view, double-click the \c{textfinder.h} file
to open it for editing.
2010-04-08 15:54:32 +02:00
\o Add a private function
to the \c{private} section, after the \c{Ui::TextFinder} function, as
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
illustrated by the following code snippet:
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2009-04-02 13:33:40 +02:00
\snippet examples/textfinder/textfinder.h 0
2009-04-02 14:45:39 +02:00
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
\endlist
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
\section2 Completing the Source File
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
Now that the header file is complete, move on to the source file,
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
textfinder.cpp.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
\list 1
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\o In the \gui{Projects} view, double-click the textfinder.cpp file
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
to open it for editing.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
\o Add code to load a text file using
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qfile.html}{QFile}, read it with
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qtextstream.html}{QTextStream}, and
2008-12-16 14:08:58 +01:00
then display it on \c{textEdit} with
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qtextedit.html#plainText-prop}{setPlainText()}.
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
This is illustrated by the following code snippet:
\snippet examples/textfinder/textfinder.cpp 0
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\o To use \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qfile.html}{QFile} and
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qtextstream.html}{QTextStream}, add the
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
following #includes to textfinder.cpp:
2009-04-02 13:33:40 +02:00
\snippet examples/textfinder/textfinder.cpp 1
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
\o For the \c{on_findButton_clicked()} slot, add code to extract the search string and
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
use the \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qtextedit.html#find}{find()} function
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
to look for the search string within the text file. This is illustrated by
the following code snippet:
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2009-04-02 13:33:40 +02:00
\snippet examples/textfinder/textfinder.cpp 2
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
\o Once both of these functions are complete, add a line to call \c{loadTextFile()} in
the constructor, as illustrated by the following code snippet:
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2009-04-02 13:33:40 +02:00
\snippet examples/textfinder/textfinder.cpp 3
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
\endlist
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
The \c{on_findButton_clicked()} slot is called automatically in
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
the uic generated ui_textfinder.h file by this line of code:
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\code
2009-03-24 17:57:43 +01:00
QMetaObject::connectSlotsByName(TextFinder);
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\endcode
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
\section2 Creating a Resource File
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
You need a resource file (.qrc) within which you embed the input
text file. The input file can be any .txt file with a paragraph of text.
Create a text file called input.txt and store it in the textfinder
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
folder.
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
To add a resource file:
\list 1
2010-05-28 15:14:22 +02:00
\o Select \gui{File > New File or Project > Qt > Qt Resource File > Choose}.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\image qtcreator-add-resource-wizard.png "New File or Project dialog"
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
The \gui {Choose the Location} dialog opens.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\image qtcreator-add-resource-wizard2.png "Choose the Location dialog"
2008-12-16 14:48:15 +01:00
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
\o In the \gui{Name} field, enter \bold{textfinder}.
\o In the \gui{Path} field, enter \c{C:\Qt\examples\TextFinder},
and click \gui{Next}.
2008-12-16 14:48:15 +01:00
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
The \gui{Project Management} dialog opens.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\image qtcreator-add-resource-wizard3.png "Project Management dialog"
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
\o In the \gui{Add to project} field, select \bold{TextFinder.pro}
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
and click \gui{Finish} to open the file in the code editor.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
\o Select \gui{Add > Add Prefix}.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\o In the \gui{Prefix} field, replace the default prefix with a slash (/).
\o Select \gui{Add > Add Files}, to locate and add input.txt.
\image qtcreator-add-resource.png "Editing resource files"
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\endlist
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section1 Compiling and Running Your Program
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
Now that you have all the necessary files, click the \inlineimage qtcreator-run.png
button to compile your program.
2009-03-24 10:01:00 +01:00
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
*/
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
/*!
\contentspage index.html
2010-04-28 16:20:24 +02:00
\previouspage creator-qml-inspector.html
2009-01-15 13:07:25 +01:00
\page creator-version-control.html
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
\nextpage adding-plugins.html
2009-01-15 13:07:25 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\title Using Version Control Systems
2009-01-15 13:07:25 +01:00
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
Version control systems supported by Qt Creator are:
2009-01-15 13:07:25 +01:00
\table
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
\header
\i \bold{Version Control System}
\i \bold{Address}
\i \bold{Notes}
2009-01-15 13:07:25 +01:00
\row
2010-05-21 11:56:12 +02:00
\i \bold{Git}
2009-01-15 13:07:25 +01:00
\i \l{http://git-scm.com/}
2009-06-08 12:51:29 +02:00
\i
2009-01-15 13:07:25 +01:00
\row
\i \bold{Subversion}
\i \l{http://subversion.tigris.org/}
2009-06-08 12:51:29 +02:00
\i
2009-01-15 13:07:25 +01:00
\row
\i \bold{Perforce}
\i \l{http://www.perforce.com}
2009-06-08 12:51:29 +02:00
\i Server version 2006.1 and later
2009-10-07 18:25:45 +02:00
\row
\i \bold{CVS}
\i \l{http://www.cvshome.org}
\i
2010-03-22 15:37:14 +05:30
\row
\i \bold{Mercurial}
\i \l{http://mercurial.selenic.com/}
\i Qt Creator 2.0 and later
2009-01-15 13:07:25 +01:00
\endtable
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\section1 Setting Up Version Control Systems
2009-01-15 13:07:25 +01:00
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
Qt Creator uses the version control system's command line clients to access
2010-05-21 11:56:12 +02:00
your repositories. To allow access, make sure that the command line clients
2010-03-23 13:16:36 +01:00
can be located using the \c{PATH} environment variable or specify the path to
2010-05-21 11:56:12 +02:00
the command line client executables in \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...} >
\gui {Version Control}.
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-05-21 11:56:12 +02:00
After you set up the version control system, use the command line to check
that everything works (for example, use the status command). If no issues arise,
you should be ready to use the system also from Qt Creator.
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
\section1 Setting Up Common Options
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
Select \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...} > \gui{Version Control} > \gui{Common}
2010-05-21 11:56:12 +02:00
to specify settings for submit messages:
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
\list
2010-05-21 11:56:12 +02:00
\o \gui{Submit message check script} is a script or program that
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
can be used to perform checks on the submit message before
submitting. The submit message is passed in as the script's first
parameter. If there is an error, the script should output a
message on standard error and return a non-zero exit code.
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
\o \gui{User/alias configuration file} takes a file in mailmap format
that lists user names and aliases. For example:
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
\code
Jon Doe <Jon.Doe@company.com>
Hans Mustermann <Hans.Mustermann@company.com> hm <info@company.com>
\endcode
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
\note The second line above specifies the alias \e{hm} and the
corresponding email address for \e{Hans Mustermann}. If the
user/alias configuration file is present, the submit editor
displays a context menu with \gui{Insert name...} that pops up a
dialog letting the user select a name.
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
\o \gui{User fields configuration file} is a simple text file
consisting of lines specifying submit message fields that take
user names, for example:
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
\code
Reviewed-by:
Signed-off-by:
\endcode
\endlist
2009-01-15 13:07:25 +01:00
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
The fields above appear below the submit message. They provide completion
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
for the aliases/public user names specified in the
\e{User/alias configuration file} as well as a button that opens the
aforementioned user name dialog.
2009-01-15 13:07:25 +01:00
2010-03-23 13:16:36 +01:00
\section1 Creating VCS Repositories for New Projects
Qt Creator allows for creating VCS repositories for version
control systems that support local repository creation, such as
2010-05-21 11:56:12 +02:00
Git or Mercurial.
2010-03-23 13:16:36 +01:00
When creating a new project by selecting \gui File >
\gui{New File or Project...}, you can choose a version
control system in the final wizard page.
2009-01-15 13:07:25 +01:00
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\section1 Using Version Control Systems
2009-01-15 13:50:22 +01:00
2010-05-21 11:56:12 +02:00
The \gui{Tools} menu contains a sub-menu for each supported version
control system.
2009-01-15 13:50:22 +01:00
2010-05-21 11:56:12 +02:00
The \gui{Version Control} output pane displays the commands
that are executed, a timestamp, and the relevant output.
Select \gui {Window > Output Panes > Version Control} to open
the pane.
2009-01-15 13:50:22 +01:00
2010-03-23 13:16:36 +01:00
2009-01-15 13:50:22 +01:00
\image qtcreator-vcs-pane.png
2010-03-23 13:16:36 +01:00
\section2 Adding Files
2009-01-15 13:50:22 +01:00
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
When you create a new file or a new project, the wizard displays a page
asking whether the files should be added to a version control system.
This happens when the parent directory or the project is already
2009-01-15 13:50:22 +01:00
under version control and the system supports the concept of adding files,
2010-05-21 11:56:12 +02:00
for example, Perforce and Subversion. Alternatively, you can
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
add files later by using the version control tool menus.
2009-01-15 13:50:22 +01:00
2010-05-21 11:56:12 +02:00
With Git, there is no concept of adding files. Instead, all modified
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
files must be staged for a commit.
2009-01-15 13:50:22 +01:00
\section2 Viewing Diff Output
All version control systems provide menu options to \e{diff} the current
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
file or project: to compare it with the latest version stored in the
repository and to display the differences. In Qt Creator, a diff is
displayed in a read-only editor. If the file is accessible, you can
double-click on a selected diff chunk and Qt Creator opens an editor
2009-01-15 13:50:22 +01:00
displaying the file, scrolled to the line in question.
\image qtcreator-vcs-diff.png
2010-03-23 13:16:36 +01:00
\section2 Viewing Versioning History and Change Details
Display the versioning history of a file by selecting \gui{Log}
2010-05-21 11:56:12 +02:00
(for Git and Mercurial) or \gui{Filelog} (for CVS, Perforce, and
Subversion). Typically, the log output contains the date, the commit
2010-03-23 13:16:36 +01:00
message, and a change or revision identifier. Click on the identifier to
display a description of the change including the diff.
Right-clicking on an identifier brings up a context menu that lets you
show annotation views of previous versions (see \l{Annotating Files}).
\image qtcreator-vcs-log.png
2009-01-15 14:30:18 +01:00
\section2 Annotating Files
Annotation views are obtained by selecting \gui{Annotate} or \gui{Blame}.
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
Selecting \gui{Annotate} or \gui{Blame} displays the lines of the file
prepended by the change identifier they originate from. Clicking on the
2010-03-23 13:16:36 +01:00
change identifier shows a detailed description of the change.
2009-01-15 14:30:18 +01:00
2010-03-23 13:16:36 +01:00
To show the annotation of a previous version, right-click on the
2010-03-23 18:01:17 +05:30
version identifier at the beginning of a line and choose one of the
revisions shown at the bottom of the context menu. This allows you to
navigate through the history of the file and obtain previous versions of
2010-05-21 11:56:12 +02:00
it. It also works for Git and Mercurial using SHA's.
2009-01-15 14:30:18 +01:00
2010-03-23 13:16:36 +01:00
The same context menu is available when right-clicking on a version
identifier in the file log view of a single file.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section2 Committing Changes
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
Once you have finished making changes, submit them to the version control
system by choosing \gui{Commit} or \gui{Submit}. Qt Creator displays a
commit page containing a text editor where you can enter your commit
message and a checkable list of modified files to be included.
2010-05-21 11:56:12 +02:00
\image qtcreator-vcs-commit.png
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
When you have finished filling out the commit page information, click on
\gui{Commit} to start committing.
The \gui{Diff Selected Files} button brings up a diff view of the
2009-01-15 14:30:18 +01:00
files selected in the file list. Since the commit page is just another
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
editor, you can go back to it by closing the diff view. You can also check
a diff view from the editor combo box showing the \gui{Opened files}.
2009-01-15 14:30:18 +01:00
2010-05-21 11:56:12 +02:00
\section2 Reverting Changes
To discard local changes to a file or project, use the \gui Revert
function or the \gui {Undo Changes/Undo Repository Changes} function
(for Git). The changes discarded depend on the version control system.
2009-01-15 14:30:18 +01:00
2010-05-21 11:56:12 +02:00
For example, in Perforce, select \gui{Revert File/Revert Project}
to discard changes made to open files, reverting them to the
revisions last synchronized from the repository. Select
\gui{Revert Unchanged} to revert files if their contents or file
type have not changed after they were opened for editing.
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-05-21 11:56:12 +02:00
\section2 Using Additional Git Functions
2009-01-15 14:30:18 +01:00
2010-05-21 11:56:12 +02:00
The \gui Git sub-menu contains the following additional items:
2009-01-15 14:30:18 +01:00
\table
2010-05-21 11:56:12 +02:00
\row
\i \gui {Apply Patch/Apply Patch...}
\i Apply changes to a file or project from a diff file. You can
either apply a patch file that is open in Qt Creator or select
the patch file to apply from the file system.
2010-03-23 13:16:36 +01:00
\row
2010-05-14 15:45:43 +02:00
\i \gui{Stash Snapshot...}
2010-05-21 11:56:12 +02:00
\i Save a snapshot of your current
2010-03-23 13:16:36 +01:00
work under a name for later reference. For example, if you
want to try out something and find out later that it does not work,
you can discard it and return to the state of the snapshot.
2009-01-15 14:30:18 +01:00
\row
\i \gui{Stash}
2010-05-21 11:56:12 +02:00
\i Stash local changes prior to executing a \gui{Pull}.
\row
\i \gui{Stash Pop}
\i Remove a single stashed state from the stash list and apply it on
top of the current working tree state.
2009-01-15 14:30:18 +01:00
\row
2009-01-15 15:57:07 +01:00
\i \gui{Pull}
\i Pull changes from the remote repository. If there are locally
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
modified files, you are prompted to stash those changes.
2010-05-21 11:56:12 +02:00
The \gui Git options page contains an option to do
2010-03-23 13:16:36 +01:00
a rebase operation while pulling.
\row
2010-05-14 15:45:43 +02:00
\i \gui{Clean Repository.../Clean Project...}
2010-03-23 13:16:36 +01:00
\i Collect all files that are not under version control
with the exception of patches and project files
and show them as a checkable list in a dialog
prompting for deletion. This lets you completely clean a build.
2009-01-15 15:57:07 +01:00
\row
\i \gui{Branches...}
\i Displays the branch dialog showing the local branches at the
top and remote branches at the bottom. To switch to the local
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
branch, double-click on it. Double-clicking on a remote
branch first creates a local branch with the same name that
tracks the remote branch, and then switches to it.
2009-01-15 15:57:07 +01:00
\image qtcreator-vcs-gitbranch.png
2010-03-23 13:16:36 +01:00
\row
\i \gui{Stashes...}
\i Displays a dialog showing the stashes created by
2010-05-14 15:45:43 +02:00
\gui{Stash Snapshot...} with options to restore,
2010-03-23 13:16:36 +01:00
display or delete them.
2010-05-21 11:56:12 +02:00
\row
\i \gui {Stage File for Commit}
\i Mark new or modified files for committing to the repository.
To undo this function, select \gui {Unstage File from Commit}.
\row
\i \gui{Show Commit...}
\i Select a commit to view. Enter the SHA of the commit
in the \gui Change field.
\endtable
\section2 Using Additional Mercurial Functions
The \gui Mercurial sub-menu contains the following additional items:
\table
\row
\i \gui{Import}
\i Apply changes from a patch file.
\row
\i \gui{Incoming}
\i Monitor the status of a remote repository by listing
the changes that will be pulled.
\row
\i \gui{Outgoing}
\i Monitor the status of a remote repository by listing
the changes that will be pushed.
\row
\i \gui{Pull}
\i Pull changes from the remote repository.
\row
\i \gui{Update}
\i Look at an earlier version of the code.
\endtable
\section2 Using Additional Perforce Functions
When you start Qt Creator, it looks for the executable specified
in the \gui{P4 command} field in \gui{Tools > Options... > Version
Control > Perforce}. If you do not use Perforce and want to turn
off the check, clear this field.
The \gui Perforce sub-menu contains the following additional items:
\table
\row
\i \gui{Describe...}
\i View information about changelists and the files in them.
\row
\i \gui{Edit File}
\i Open a file for editing.
\row
\i \gui{Opened}
\i List files that are open for editing.
\row
\i \gui{Pending Changes...}
\i Group files for commit.
\row
\i \gui{Update All/Update Current Project}
\i Fetch the current version of the current project or all
projects from the repository.
2009-01-15 14:30:18 +01:00
\endtable
2010-05-21 11:56:12 +02:00
\section2 Using Additional Subversion Functions
The \gui Subversion sub-menu contains the following additional items:
\table
\row
\i \gui{Describe...}
\i Display commit log messages for a revision.
\row
\i \gui{Update Project/Update Repository}
\i Update your working copy.
\endtable
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
*/
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
/*!
\contentspage index.html
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\previouspage creator-editor-refactoring.html
\page creator-editor-locator.html
2010-05-18 15:20:04 +02:00
\nextpage creator-editor-codepasting.html
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\title Searching With the Locator
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
The locator provides one of the easiest ways in Qt Creator to browse
through projects, files, classes, methods, documentation and file systems.
You can find the locator in the bottom left of the Qt Creator window.
To activate the locator, press \key Ctrl+K (\key Cmd+K on Mac OS
X) or select \gui Tools > \gui Locate....
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
\image qtcreator-locator.png
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
To edit the currently open project's main.cpp file using the locator:
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\list 1
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Activate the locator by pressing \key Ctrl+K.
2010-03-19 18:19:50 +05:30
\o Enter \tt{main.cpp}.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\image qtcreator-locator-open.png
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\o Press \key Return.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
The main.cpp file opens in the editor.
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\endlist
2010-02-17 11:12:38 +01:00
It is also possible to enter only a part of a search string.
As you type, the locator shows the occurrences of that string regardless
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
of where in the name of an component it appears.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
To narrow down the search results, you can use the following wildcard
characters:
\list
2010-03-19 18:19:50 +05:30
\o To match any number of any or no characters, enter \bold{*}.
\o To match a single instance of any character, enter \bold{?}.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\endlist
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section1 Using the Locator Filters
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
The \gui Locator allows you to browse not only files, but any items
defined by \bold{locator filters}. By default, the locator contains
filters which locate:
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
\list
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\o Any open document
2010-03-19 18:19:50 +05:30
\o Files anywhere on your file system
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Files belonging to your project, such as source, header resource,
and .ui files
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\o Class and method definitions in your project or anywhere referenced
from your project
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Help topics, including Qt documentation
\o Specific line in the document displayed in your editor
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
\endlist
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
To use a specific locator filter, type the assigned prefix followed by
\key Space. The prefix is usually a single character.
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
For example, to locate symbols matching
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qdatastream.html}{QDataStream:}
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\list 1
\o Activate the locator.
\o Enter \tt{\bold{: QDataStream}} (: (colon) followed by a
\key Space and the symbol name (QDataStream)).
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
The locator lists the results.
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\image qtcreator-navigate-popup.png
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\endlist
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
By default the following filters are enabled and you do not need to use
their prefixes explicitly:
\list
\o Going to a line in the current file (l).
\o Going to an open file (o).
\o Going to a file in any open project (a).
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\endlist
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section2 Using the Default Locator Filters
The following locator filters are available by default:
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
\table
\header
\o Function
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Enter in locator
\o Example
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Go to a line in the current file.
\o \tt{\bold{l \e{Line number}}}
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
\o \image qtcreator-locator-line.png
\row
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\o Go to a symbol definition.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o \tt{\bold{: \e{Symbol name}}}
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
\o \image qtcreator-locator-symbols.png
\row
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\o Go to a help topic.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o \tt{\bold{? \e{Help topic}}}
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
\o \image qtcreator-locator-help.png
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Go to an open file.
\o \tt{\bold{o \e{File name}}}
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
\o \image qtcreator-locator-opendocs.png
\row
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\o Go to a file in the file system (browse the file system).
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o \tt{\bold{f \e{File name}}}
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
\o \image qtcreator-locator-filesystem.png
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Go to a file in any project currently open.
\o \tt{\bold{a \e{File name}}}
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
\o \image qtcreator-locator-files.png
\row
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\o Go to a file in the current project.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o \tt{\bold{p \e{File name}}}
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
\o \image qtcreator-locator-current-project.png
\row
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\o Go to a class definition.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o \tt{\bold{c \e{Class name}}}
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
\o \image qtcreator-locator-classes.png
\row
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\o Go to a method definition.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o \tt{\bold{m \e{Method name}}}
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
\o \image qtcreator-locator-methods.png
\endtable
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section2 Creating Locator Filters
2009-11-23 12:55:07 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
To quickly access files not directly mentioned in your project, you can
create your own locator filters. That way you can locate files in a
directory structure you have defined.
To create a locator filter:
\list 1
\o In the locator, click \inlineimage qtcreator-locator-magnify.png
and select \gui Configure....
\image qtcreator-locator-customize.png
2010-03-24 17:30:47 +05:30
\o In the \gui{Options...} window click \gui Add.
\o In the \gui{Filters} dialog:
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\list
\o Name your filter.
\o Select at least one directory. The locator searches directories
recursively.
\o Define the file pattern as a comma separated list. For example,
2010-03-19 18:19:50 +05:30
to search all .h and .cpp files, enter \bold{*.h,*.cpp}
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Specify the prefix string.
To show only results matching this filter, select
\gui{Limit to prefix}.
\image qtcreator-navigate-customfilter.png
\endlist
\o Click OK.
\endlist
\section3 Configuring the Locator Cache
The locator searches the files matching your file pattern in the
directories you have selected and caches that information. The cache for
all default filters is updated as you write your code. The filters you have
created Qt Creator by default updates once an hour.
To update the cached information manually, click
\inlineimage qtcreator-locator-magnify.png
and select \gui Refresh.
To set a new cache update time:
\list 1
\o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Locator.
\o In \gui{Refresh interval} define new time in minutes.
\endlist
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
*/
2009-07-27 15:06:43 +02:00
/*!
\contentspage index.html
2010-05-18 15:20:04 +02:00
\previouspage creator-developing-symbian.html
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\page creator-project-managing-sessions.html
2010-05-18 15:20:04 +02:00
\nextpage creator-building-running.html
2009-07-27 15:06:43 +02:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\title Managing Sessions
2009-07-27 15:06:43 +02:00
In Qt Creator, a session is a collection of:
\list
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\o Open projects with their dependencies
\o Open editors
\o Breakpoints and watches
\o Bookmarks
2009-07-27 15:06:43 +02:00
\endlist
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
When you launch Qt Creator, a list of existing sessions is displayed on the
\gui{Welcome screen}.
2009-07-27 15:06:43 +02:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\image qtcreator-welcome-session.png
2009-08-04 12:56:09 +02:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
To switch between sessions, select the session from sessions listed in
\gui File > \gui Session. If you do not create or select a session,
Qt Creator always uses the default session.
2009-08-04 12:56:09 +02:00
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
To create a new session or remove existing sessions, select \gui File >
\gui Sessions > \gui{Session Manager}.
2009-08-04 12:56:09 +02:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\image qtcreator-session-manager.png
2009-07-27 15:06:43 +02:00
*/
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
/*!
\contentspage index.html
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
\previouspage creator-maemo-emulator.html
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\page creator-debugging.html
2010-04-28 16:20:24 +02:00
\nextpage creator-debugging-cpp.html
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\title Debugging
2009-04-15 16:34:23 +02:00
2010-04-28 16:20:24 +02:00
You can use the Qt Creator \gui Debug mode to inspect the state of your
Qt and Qt Quick projects while debugging.
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
Qt Creator does not include a debugger. It provides a debugger plugin that acts
2010-04-20 09:25:32 +02:00
as an interface between the Qt Creator core and external native debuggers
such as the GNU Symbolic Debugger (gdb), the Microsoft Console Debugger (CDB),
2010-04-28 16:20:24 +02:00
and an internal Java Script debugger. You can use the native debuggers to
debug the C++ language.
\image qtcreator-debugger-views.png "Native debugger views"
Qt Creator includes a QML inspector plugin that you can use to debug QML.
\image qmldesigner-inspector.png "QML inspector views"
When you start debugging, the appropriate tool is automatically selected depending
on the type of the project. If you only develop one kind of projects, you can turn
2010-05-07 12:44:05 +02:00
off this automation in \gui {Tools > Options... > Debugger > General}. Deselect the
2010-04-28 16:20:24 +02:00
\gui {Change debugger language automatically} check box.
The choice of language also determines the contents of the \gui Debug menu.
The \gui {Start Debugging > Start Debugging} command starts debugging by using the
tool appropriate for the project type. The availability of the other commands depends
on whether \gui C++ or \gui QML is selected in \gui {Debug > Language}.
You can create Qt Quick projects that contain C++ plugins or Qt projects that contain
QML content. While debugging such projects, you can switch between the native
debuggers and the QML inspector during debugging.
To switch between debugged languages, select \gui {Debug > Language > C++} or
\gui QML. You can also press \key {Ctrl+L, 1} to switch to the native debugger and
\key {Ctrl+L, 2} to switch to the QML inspector.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-debugging-helpers.html
\page creator-debugging-qml.html
\nextpage creator-qml-inspector.html
\title Debugging Qt Quick Applications
In the \gui Debug mode you can use the QML inspector plugin to:
\list
\o View the status of the application when it is executed.
\o View debug output.
\o Write JavaScript expressions and evaluate them.
\o Modify the values of properties.
\o Watch the values of expressions.
\note You can press \key {Ctr+Alt+R} or select \gui {Tools > Qt Quick > Preview}
2010-05-21 12:13:50 +02:00
to view QML files that do not belong to projects in \QQV. However,
2010-04-28 16:20:24 +02:00
you can only debug QML files that belong to open projects, because the QML
inspector plugin needs information about the project.
\endlist
\section1 Modes of Operation
When a Qt Quick project is active and you select \gui {Debug > Start Debugging >
2010-05-21 12:13:50 +02:00
Start Debugging} the application is started in \QQV and inspected by
2010-04-28 16:20:24 +02:00
the QML inspector.
If the Qt Quick project includes C++ plugins, select
\gui {Debug > Start Debugging > Start Debugging C++ and QML Simultaneously}.
2010-05-21 12:13:50 +02:00
\QQV is started, the native debugger is attached to it, and
the application is inspected by the QML inspector.
2010-04-28 16:20:24 +02:00
\note This command is available only if \gui QML is selected in
\gui {Debug > Language (QML)}.
To debug a Qt project that contains QML content, select
\gui {Debug > Start Debugging > Start Debugging C++ and QML Simultaneously}.
The application is started under the control of the native debugger, attached
2010-05-21 12:13:50 +02:00
to \QQV, and inspected by the QML inspector.
2010-04-28 16:20:24 +02:00
You must use the native debugger to set breakpoints to C++ code and to examine
the state of the interrupted Qt application. When a C++ program is interrupted,
for example when a breakpoint is hit, you cannot use the QML inspector.
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-debugging-qml.html
\page creator-qml-inspector.html
\nextpage creator-version-control.html
\title Using the QML Inspector
In \gui Debug mode, you can use several views to interact with the
application you are debugging. Frequently used views are shown by
default and rarely used ones are hidden. To change the default settings,
select \gui Debug > \gui Views, and then select views to display
or hide. You can also lock views. The position of views is saved for future
sessions.
\image qmldesigner-inspector.png "QML inspector views"
\section1 Starting the QML Inspector
To start an active application under the control of the QML inspector, select
\gui {Debug > Start Debugging > Start Debugging}, or press \key{F5}.
2010-05-21 12:13:50 +02:00
The application is run in \QQV. It behaves and performs as usual.
2010-04-28 16:20:24 +02:00
You can view the status of the application when it is executed and the debug
output in the \gui {Application Output} view.
\image qmldesigner-application-output.png "Application Output view"
\section1 Starting Simultaneous QML and C++ Debugging
To debug a Qt Quick project that includes C++ plugins, select
\gui {Debug > Start Debugging > Start Debugging C++ and QML Simultaneously}.
\note This command is available only if \gui QML is selected in
\gui {Debug > Language (QML)}.
\image qmldesigner-debugging-simultaneous.png "Start Simultaneous QML and C++ Debugging view"
2010-05-21 12:13:50 +02:00
Usually, the settings for \QQV are specified automatically and you do
2010-04-28 16:20:24 +02:00
not need to change them:
\list
2010-05-21 12:13:50 +02:00
\o \gui {Debugging address} is the IP address to access \QQV.
2010-04-28 16:20:24 +02:00
2010-05-21 12:13:50 +02:00
\o \gui {Debugging port} is the port to access \QQV. You can use any
2010-04-28 16:20:24 +02:00
free port in the registered port range.
2010-05-21 12:13:50 +02:00
\o \gui {Viewer path} is the path to \QQV executable.
2010-04-28 16:20:24 +02:00
2010-05-21 12:13:50 +02:00
\o \gui {Viewer arguments} sets arguments for running \QQV.
2010-04-28 16:20:24 +02:00
The \c{-I <directory>} argument searches for C++ or QML plugins from
the project folder. For a list of available arguments, enter \c {qml --help}
on the command line.
\endlist
2010-05-21 12:13:50 +02:00
\QQV is started, the native debugger is attached to it, and
the application is inspected by the QML inspector.
2010-04-28 16:20:24 +02:00
\section1 Viewing and Modifying Values of Properties
The \gui {Properties and Watchers} view lists the JavaScript expressions
in the project and their properties and values. The properties are grouped
by type, but you can also view them in one long list.
Right-click the list of properties to open a context-menu and then click
\gui {Group by Item Type} to change the way in which the properties are
sorted.
If an item does not have an ID, you cannot change the values of its
properties. The item type is enclosed in angle brackets and the value
is grayed.
Double-click an item to move to the place in code where it is declared.
2010-05-21 12:13:50 +02:00
You can change the values of properties and see the results in \QQV.
2010-04-28 16:20:24 +02:00
If the QML inspector cannot retrieve the value for an item or a property for
inspection, the item or property is grayed in the view. Right-click the item list
to open a context menu, and then click \gui {Show Uninspectable Items} to hide
or show the items that cannot be inspected.
\section1 Watching Expressions
In the \gui {Properties and Watchers} view, you can specify that an expression is
watched. Right-click a property and then click \gui {Watch Expression}.
The \gui Name and \gui Value of the expression are displayed at the bottom
of the view.
\image qmldesigner-inspector-watchers.png "Watched expressions"
You can add JavaScript expressions to object instances to evaluate them.
Right-click the list of items and select \gui {Add Watch Expression}. Enter
the expression to evaluate and click \gui OK.
\image qmldesigner-inspector-add-watch.png "Add Watch Expression dialog"
To stop watching a expression, right-click it and select \gui {Stop Watching}.
The QML inspector cannot show the values for some items, such as composite objects
or complicated item that you cannot change. These items cannot be watched.
To show them, right-click the properties list, and then select
\gui {Show Unwatchable Properties}.
\section1 Executing JavaScript
In the \gui {Script Console} view, you can write JavaScript expressions, see
how they are executed, and evaluate them during runtime.
You can also test the C++ code without rebuilding the whole application.
2010-05-21 12:13:50 +02:00
\section1 Viewing Connections to \QQV
2010-04-28 16:20:24 +02:00
The \gui Output view displays the status of the connection between the QML
2010-05-21 12:13:50 +02:00
inspector and \QQV.
2010-04-28 16:20:24 +02:00
You specify the connection in the \gui {Run Settings} in the \gui Projects mode.
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
For more information, see \l{Specifying Run Settings for Qt Quick Projects}.
2010-04-28 16:20:24 +02:00
If the connection does not work, check the values of the \gui {Debugging address}
and \gui {Debugging port} fields. Check that the default port number is not reserved
2010-05-21 12:13:50 +02:00
by another application or another instance of \QQV that was not shut
2010-04-28 16:20:24 +02:00
down properly. You can specify any free port number in the registered port range
(1024-49151).
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-debugging.html
\page creator-debugging-cpp.html
\nextpage creator-debugging-example.html
\title Debugging Qt Applications
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
2010-04-20 16:27:41 +02:00
In the \gui Debug mode you can interact with the debugger in several ways, including
the following:
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\list
\o Go through a program line-by-line or instruction-by-instruction.
\o Interrupt running programs.
\o Set breakpoints.
2010-04-20 09:25:32 +02:00
\o Examine the contents of the call stack.
\o Examine and modify registers and memory contents of
the debugged program.
\o Examine and modify registers and memory contents of
local and global variables.
\o Examine the list of loaded shared libraries.
\o Create snapshots of the current state of the debugged program
and re-examine them later.
\endlist
Qt Creator displays the raw information provided by the native debuggers
in a clear and concise manner with the goal to simplify the debugging process
as much as possible without losing the power of the native debuggers.
In addition to the generic IDE functionality provided by stack view, views for
locals and watchers, registers, and so on, Qt Creator includes
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
features to make debugging Qt-based applications easy. The debugger
plugin understands the internal layout of several Qt classes, for
2010-04-20 09:25:32 +02:00
example, QString, the Qt containers, and most importantly QObject
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
(and classes derived from it), as well as most containers of the C++
2010-04-20 09:25:32 +02:00
Standard Library and some gcc and Symbian extensions. This
deeper understanding is used to present objects of such classes in
a useful way.
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
For an example of how to debug applications in the \gui Debug mode, see
\l{Debugging the Example Application}.
2009-04-15 16:34:23 +02:00
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
For more information about the functions available in the \gui Debug mode,
see \l{Interacting with the Debugger}.
2009-04-08 16:34:42 +02:00
2010-04-20 09:25:32 +02:00
If you install Qt Creator as part of a Qt SDK, the GNU Symbolic Debugger
is installed automatically and you should be ready to start debugging after
you create a new
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
project. If you want a special setup, such as using debugging tools for Windows,
2010-04-20 09:25:32 +02:00
see \l {Setting Up Debugger}.
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
2010-04-13 13:36:02 +02:00
\section1 Modes of Operation
2010-04-20 09:25:32 +02:00
The debugger plugin runs in different operating modes depending on where and
2010-04-13 13:36:02 +02:00
how the process is started and run. Some of the modes are only available for
a particular operating system or platform.
You can launch the debugger in the following modes:
\list
2010-04-20 09:25:32 +02:00
\o \bold Plain to debug locally started applications, such as a
Qt based GUI application.
2010-04-13 13:36:02 +02:00
\o \bold Terminal to debug locally started processes that need a
2010-04-20 09:25:32 +02:00
console, typically without a GUI.
2010-04-13 13:36:02 +02:00
\o \bold Attach to debug local processes started outside Qt Creator.
\o \bold Remote to debug a process running on a different machine.
\o \bold Core to debug crashed processes on Unix.
\o \bold Post-mortem to debug crashed processes on Windows.
\o \bold TRK to debug processes running on a Symbian device.
\endlist
When you click the \gui {Start Debugging} button, the debugger is launched
in the appropriate operating mode (plain, terminal, or TRK), based on the
build and run settings for the active project. Select \gui Debug menu options
to launch the debugger in the other modes.
\section2 Plain Mode
To launch the debugger in the plain mode, click the \gui {Start Debugging}
button for the active project, or choose
\gui {Debug > Start Debugging > Start and Debug External Application...}
and specify an executable.
\section2 Terminal Mode
To launch the debugger in the terminal mode, select \gui {Projects > Run Settings}
2010-05-14 15:45:43 +02:00
and select the \gui {Run in terminal} check box. Then click the
2010-04-13 13:36:02 +02:00
\gui {Start Debugging} button for the active project.
\section2 Attach Mode
To launch the debugger in the attach mode, select
\gui {Debug > Start Debugging > Attach to Running External Application...},
2010-04-20 09:25:32 +02:00
and then select a process by its name or process ID to attach to.
2010-04-13 13:36:02 +02:00
\section2 Remote Mode
The remote mode uses a \e{gdbserver} daemon that runs on the remote machine.
To launch the debugger in the remote mode, select
\gui {Debug > Start Debugging > Start and Attach to Remote Application...}.
\section2 Core Mode
The core mode is available only in Unix. It debugs crashed processes using
the \e {core} files (crash dumps) that are generated if the setting
is enabled in the shell.
To enable the dumping of core files, enter the following command in the
shell from which the application will be launched:
\code
ulimit -c unlimited
\endcode
To launch the debugger in the core mode, select
\gui{Debug > Start Debugging > Attach to Core...}.
\section2 Post-Mortem Mode
The post-mortem mode is available only on Windows, if you have installed
the debugging tools for Windows.
The Qt Creator installation program asks you whether you want to
register Qt Creator as a post-mortem debugger. To change the setting, select
2010-05-07 12:44:05 +02:00
\gui{Tools > Options... > Debugger > Common > Use Creator for post-mortem debugging}.
2010-04-13 13:36:02 +02:00
You can launch the debugger in the post-mortem mode if an application crashes
on Windows. Click the \gui {Debug in Qt Creator} button in the error message
that is displayed by the Windows operating system.
\section2 TRK Mode
2010-04-20 09:25:32 +02:00
The TRK mode is a special mode available only for Symbian. It
debugs processes running on a Symbian
2010-04-13 13:36:02 +02:00
device using the App TRK application that runs on the device.
To launch the debugger in the TRK mode, open the project, select Symbian as the
target, and click the \gui {Start Debugging} button.
For more information on setting up Symbian projects, see
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\l{Setting Up Development Environment for Symbian}.
2010-04-13 13:36:02 +02:00
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-debug-mode.html
\page creator-debugger-engines.html
\nextpage creator-debugging-helpers.html
\title Setting Up Debugger
2010-04-20 09:25:32 +02:00
Typically, the interaction between Qt Creator and the native debugger is set
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
up automatically and you do not need to do anything. However, you might have an
unsupported gdb version installed, your Linux environment might not have gdb
installed at all, or you might want to use the debugging tools for Windows.
\note To use the debugging tools for Windows, you must install them and add the
Symbol Server provided by Microsoft to the symbol search path of the debugger.
For more information, see \l{Setting the Symbol Server in Windows}.
This section explains the
options you have for debugging C++ code and provides installation notes for the
2010-04-20 09:25:32 +02:00
supported native debuggers.
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
2010-04-20 09:25:32 +02:00
\section1 Supported Native Debugger Versions
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
2010-04-20 09:25:32 +02:00
The debugger plugin supports different builds of the gdb debugger, both
with and without the ability to use Python scripting. The Python enabled
versions are preferred, but they are not available on Mac and on older
versions of Linux.
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
On Windows, Symbian, and Maemo, only the Python version is supported.
The non-Python versions use the compiled version of the debugging helpers,
that you must enable separately. For more information, see
\l{Debugging Helper Library with C++}.
2010-04-20 09:25:32 +02:00
The Python version uses a script version of the debugging helpers
that does not need any special setup.
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
2010-04-20 09:25:32 +02:00
The CDB native debugger has similar funtionality to the non-Python gdb debugger
engine. Specifically, it also uses compiled C++ code for the debugging
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
helper library.
The following table summarizes the support for debugging C++ code:
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\table
2009-04-08 16:34:42 +02:00
\header
\o Platform
\o Compiler
2010-04-20 09:25:32 +02:00
\o Native Debugger
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\o Python
2010-04-20 09:25:32 +02:00
\o Debugger Modes
2009-03-24 10:01:00 +01:00
\row
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\o Linux
2009-04-15 16:34:23 +02:00
\o gcc
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\o gdb
\o Optional
\o Term, Plain, Attach (with Python, only), Remote
\row
\o Unix
\o gcc
\o gdb
\o Yes
\o Term, Plain, Attach, Remote
\row
\o Mac OS
\o gcc
\o gdb
\o No
\o Term, Plain, Attach
2009-04-08 16:34:42 +02:00
\row
2009-04-15 16:34:23 +02:00
\o Windows/MinGW
\o gcc
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\o gdb
\o No
\o Term, Plain, Attach, Remote
2009-04-08 16:34:42 +02:00
\row
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\o Windows/MSVC
2009-04-15 16:34:23 +02:00
\o Microsoft Visual C++ Compiler
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\o Debugging Tools for Windows/CDB
\o Not applicable
2010-04-13 13:36:02 +02:00
\o Term, Plain, Attach, Post-Mortem
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\row
\o Symbian
\o gcc
\o gdb
\o Yes
\o TRK
\row
\o Maemo
\o gcc
\o gdb
\o Yes
\o Remote
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\endtable
2010-04-20 09:25:32 +02:00
\omit
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
2010-04-20 09:25:32 +02:00
\section2 Gdb Adapter Modes
[Advanced Topic]
The gdb native debugger used internally by the debugger plugin runs in
different adapter modes to cope with the variety
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
of supported platforms and environments. All gdb adapters inherit from
2010-04-13 13:36:02 +02:00
AbstractGdbAdapter:
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\list
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\o PlainGdbAdapter debugs locally started GUI processes.
It is physically split into parts that are relevant only when Python is
available, parts relevant only when Python is not available, and mixed code.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\o TermGdbAdapter debugs locally started processes that need a
console.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\o AttachGdbAdapter debugs local processes started outside Qt Creator.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\o CoreGdbAdapter debugs core files generated from crashes.
\o RemoteGdbAdapter interacts with the gdbserver running on Linux.
\o TrkGdbAdapter interacts with Symbian devices. The gdb protocol and
the gdb serial protocol are used between gdb and the adapter. The TRK
protocol is used between the adapter and AppTRK running on the device.
\endlist
2010-04-20 09:25:32 +02:00
\endomit
\section1 Installing Native Debuggers
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
2010-04-20 09:25:32 +02:00
There are various reasons why the debugger plugin may fail to automatically
pick up a suitable native debugger. The native debugger might be missing
(which is usually the case for the CDB debugger on Windows which always
needs to be installed manually by the user) or the installed version is not
supported.
Check the table below for the supported versions and other important
information about installing native debuggers.
2009-04-15 16:34:23 +02:00
\table
\header
2010-04-20 09:25:32 +02:00
\o Native Debugger
2009-04-15 16:34:23 +02:00
\o Notes
2009-05-28 15:31:12 +02:00
\row
\o Gdb
2010-04-01 11:38:30 +02:00
\o On Linux, install version 6.8, 7.0.1 (version 7.0 is not supported),
2010-04-20 09:25:32 +02:00
7.1, or later. On Mac OS X, install Apple gdb version 6.3.50-20050815
(build 1344) or later.
2010-04-01 11:38:30 +02:00
2009-04-15 16:34:23 +02:00
\row
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\o Debugging tools for Windows
2009-04-15 16:34:23 +02:00
\o Using this engine requires you to install the
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\e{Debugging tools for Windows}
2009-05-28 15:31:12 +02:00
\l{http://www.microsoft.com/whdc/devtools/debugging/installx86.Mspx}{32-bit}
or
\l{http://www.microsoft.com/whdc/devtools/debugging/install64bit.Mspx}{64-bit}
2009-10-06 15:50:48 +02:00
package (Version 6.11.1.404 for the 32-bit or the 64-bit version of Qt Creator, respectively),
2009-04-15 16:34:23 +02:00
which is freely available for download from the
\l{http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/default.aspx}
2009-05-28 15:31:12 +02:00
{Microsoft Developer Network}.
2010-05-20 14:06:14 +02:00
\note Visual Studio does not include the Debugging tools needed,
and therefore, you must install them separately.
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
2010-05-20 14:06:14 +02:00
The pre-built \e{Qt SDK for Windows} makes use
of the library if it is present on the system. When manually building Qt
Creator using the Microsoft Visual C++ Compiler, the build process checks
for the required files in \c{"%ProgramFiles%\Debugging Tools for Windows"}.
It is highly recommended that you add the Symbol Server provided by Microsoft to the symbol
search path of the debugger. The Symbol Server provides you
with debugging informaton for the operating system libraries for debugging
Windows applications. For more information, see
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\l{Setting the Symbol Server in Windows}.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\row
\o Debugging tools for Mac OS X
\o The Qt binary distribution contains both debug and release
variants of the libraries. But you have to explicitly tell the
runtime linker that you want to use the debug libraries even if
your application is compiled as debug as release is the default
library.
If you use a qmake based project in Qt Creator, you can set a
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
flag in your run configuration, in \gui Projects mode. In the run
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
configuration, select \gui{Use debug version of frameworks}.
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
For more detailed information about debugging on the Mac, see:
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\l http://developer.apple.com/mac/library/technotes/tn2004/tn2124.html
\note The Mac OS X Snow Leopard (10.6) has a bug, that can be worked
around as described in the link provided below:
\l http://bugreports.qt.nokia.com/browse/QTBUG-4962.
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\endtable
\section1 Setting the Symbol Server in Windows
2009-04-15 16:34:23 +02:00
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
To obtain debugging information for the operating system libraries for
debugging Windows applications, add the Symbol Server provided
by Microsoft to the symbol search path of the debugger:
\list 1
\o Select \gui Tools > \gui{Options...} > \gui Debugger > \gui Cdb.
\o In the \gui {Symbol paths} field, open the \gui{Insert...} menu
and select \gui{Symbol Server...}.
\o Select a directory where you want to store the cached information
and click \gui OK.
2010-05-20 14:06:14 +02:00
Use a subfolder in a temporary directory, such as
\c {C:\temp\symbolcache}.
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\endlist
2010-05-20 14:06:14 +02:00
\note Populating the cache might take a long time on a slow network
connection.
\omit In v2.1 and later:
\note The first time you start debugging by using the
Debugging tools for Windows, Qt Creator prompts you to add the Symbol
Server.
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
2010-05-20 14:06:14 +02:00
\endomit
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-debugging-example.html
\page creator-debug-mode.html
\nextpage creator-debugger-engines.html
2009-04-15 16:34:23 +02:00
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\title Interacting with the Debugger
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
In \gui Debug mode, you can use several views to interact with the
program you are debugging. Frequently used views are shown by
2010-03-30 13:46:39 +03:00
default and rarely used ones are hidden. To change the default settings,
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
select \gui Debug > \gui Views, and then select views to display
or hide. You can also lock views. The position of views is saved for future
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
sessions.
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\image qtcreator-debugger-views.png "Debug mode views"
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\section1 Starting the Debugger
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
To start a program under the debugger's control, select \gui{Debug} >
\gui{Start Debugging} > \gui{Start Debugging}, or press \key{F5}.
Qt Creator checks whether the compiled program is up-to-date, rebuilding
it if necessary. The debugger then takes over and starts the program.
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\note Starting a program in the debugger can take a considerable amount of
time, typically in the range of several seconds to minutes if complex
features (like QtWebKit) are used.
Once the program starts running, it behaves and performs as usual.
2010-03-30 13:46:39 +03:00
You can interrupt a running program by selecting \gui{Debug} >
\gui {Interrupt}. The program is automatically interrupted as soon as a
breakpoint is hit.
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
Once the program stops, Qt Creator:
\list
\o Retrieves data representing the call stack at the program's current
position.
\o Retrieves the contents of local variables.
\o Examines \gui Watchers.
\o Updates the \gui Registers, \gui Modules, and \gui Disassembler
views.
\endlist
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
You can use the \gui Debug mode views to examine the data in more detail.
You can use the following keyboard shortcuts:
\list
\o To finish debugging, press \key{Shift+F5}.
\o To execute a line of code as a whole, press \key{F10}.
\o To step into a function or a sub-function, press \key{F11}.
\o To continue running the program, press \key{F5}.
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\endlist
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
It is also possible to continue executing the program until the current
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
function completes or jump to an arbitrary position in the current function.
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\section1 Setting Breakpoints
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
A breakpoint represents a position or sets of positions in the code that,
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
when executed, interrupts the program being debugged and passes the control
2010-03-30 13:46:39 +03:00
to you. You can then examine the state of the interrupted program, or
continue execution either line-by-line or continuously.
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
Qt Creator shows breakpoints in the \gui{Breakpoints} view which is enabled
by default. The \gui{Breakpoints} view is also accessible when the debugger
and the program being debugged is not running.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\image qtcreator-debug-breakpoints.png "Breakpoints view"
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
Typically, breakpoints are associated with a source code file and line, or
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
the start of a function -- both are allowed in Qt Creator.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
The interruption of a program by a breakpoint can be restricted with
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
certain conditions.
2010-03-30 13:46:39 +03:00
To set a breakpoint:
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\list
2010-03-30 13:46:39 +03:00
\o At a particular line you want the program to stop, click the
2008-12-08 15:14:36 +01:00
left margin or press \key F9 (\key F8 for Mac OS X).
2010-03-30 13:46:39 +03:00
\o At a function that you want the program to interrupt, enter the
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
function's name in \gui{Set Breakpoint at Function...} located in the
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
context menu of the \gui{Breakpoints} view.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\endlist
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
\note You can remove a breakpoint:
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\list
2010-03-30 13:46:39 +03:00
\o By clicking the breakpoint marker in the text editor.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\o By selecting the breakpoint in the breakpoint view and pressing
\key{Delete}.
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\o By selecting \gui{Delete Breakpoint} from the context
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
menu in the \gui Breakpoints view.
\endlist
2010-03-30 13:46:39 +03:00
You can set and delete breakpoints before the program starts running or
while it is running under the debugger's control. Breakpoints are saved
together with a session.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\section1 Viewing Call Stack Trace
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2009-03-24 10:01:00 +01:00
When the program being debugged is interrupted, Qt Creator displays the
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
nested function calls leading to the current position as a call stack
trace. This stack trace is built up from call stack frames, each
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
representing a particular function. For each function, Qt Creator tries
2009-03-24 10:01:00 +01:00
to retrieve the file name and line number of the corresponding source
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
file. This data is shown in the \gui Stack view.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2008-12-16 18:39:10 +01:00
\image qtcreator-debug-stack.png
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
Since the call stack leading to the current position may originate or go
through code for which no debug information is available, not all stack
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
frames have corresponding source locations. Stack frames without
corresponding source locations are grayed out in the \gui{Stack} view.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-30 13:46:39 +03:00
If you click a frame with a known source location, the text editor
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
jumps to the corresponding location and updates the \gui{Locals and Watchers}
2009-03-24 10:01:00 +01:00
view, making it seem like the program was interrupted before entering the
function.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\section1 Viewing Threads
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-03-30 13:46:39 +03:00
If a multi-threaded program is interrupted, the \gui Thread view or the
2008-12-08 15:14:36 +01:00
combobox named \gui Thread in the debugger's status bar can be used to
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
switch from one thread to another. The \gui Stack view adjusts itself
2008-12-08 15:14:36 +01:00
accordingly.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\section1 Viewing Modules and Source Files
The \gui{Modules} view and \gui{Source Files} views display information
that the debugger plugin has about modules and source files included in
the project. The \gui{Modules} view lists the modules in the project and
symbols within the modules. In addition, it indicates where the module
was loaded.
The \gui{Source Files} view lists all the source files included in the project.
If you cannot step into an instruction, you can check whether the source file is
actually part of the project, or whether it was compiled
elsewhere. The view shows the path to each file in the file system.
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
By default, the \gui{Modules} view and \gui{Source Files} view are hidden.
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\section1 Viewing Disassembled Code and Register State
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
The \gui{Disassembler} view displays disassembled code for the current
function. The \gui{Registers} view displays the current state of the CPU's
registers.
The \gui{Disassembler} view and the \gui{Registers} view are both useful
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
for low-level commands for checking single instructions, such as \gui{Step Into}
and \gui{Step Over}. By default, both \gui{Disassembler} and
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
\gui{Registers} view are hidden.
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\section1 Locals and Watchers
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
Whenever a program stops under the control of the debugger, it retrieves
information about the topmost stack frame and displays it in the
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
\gui{Locals and Watchers} view. The \gui{Locals and Watchers} view
typically includes information about parameters of the function in that
frame as well as the local variables.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\image qtcreator-watcher.png "Locals and Watchers view"
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
Compound variables of struct or class type are displayed as
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
expandable in the view. Expand entries to show
2010-03-30 13:46:39 +03:00
all members. Together with the display of value and type, you can
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
examine and traverse the low-level layout of object data.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\table
\row
2009-03-31 17:48:14 +02:00
\i \bold{Note:}
2008-12-02 13:06:53 +01:00
2009-04-15 17:28:04 +02:00
\row
2008-12-02 13:06:53 +01:00
\i Gdb, and therefore Qt Creator's debugger works for optimized
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
builds on Linux and Mac OS X. Optimization can lead to
re-ordering of instructions or removal of some local variables,
causing the \gui{Locals and Watchers} view to show unexpected
data.
2009-04-15 17:28:04 +02:00
\row
2008-12-02 13:06:53 +01:00
\i The debug information provided by gcc does not include enough
information about the time when a variable is initialized.
2009-03-31 17:48:14 +02:00
Therefore, Qt Creator can not tell whether the contents of a
2008-12-02 13:06:53 +01:00
local variable contains "real data", or "initial noise". If a
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
QObject appears uninitialized, its value is reported as
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\gui {not in scope}. Not all uninitialized objects, however, can be
2008-12-02 13:06:53 +01:00
recognized as such.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\endtable
2008-12-02 13:06:53 +01:00
The \gui{Locals and Watchers} view also provides access to the most
powerful feature of the debugger: comprehensive display of data belonging
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
to Qt's basic objects.
To enable Qt's basic objects data display feature:
\list
2010-03-30 13:46:39 +03:00
\o Select \gui Tools > \gui {Options...} > \gui Debugger >
2010-05-14 15:45:43 +02:00
\gui{Debugging Helper} and check the \gui{Use Debugging Helper}
2010-03-30 13:46:39 +03:00
checkbox.
\o The \gui{Locals and Watchers} view is reorganized to provide a
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
high-level view of the objects.
\endlist
2010-03-30 13:46:39 +03:00
For example, in case of QObject, instead of displaying a pointer to some
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
private data structure, you see a list of children, signals and slots.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2008-12-04 17:27:29 +01:00
Similarly, instead of displaying many pointers and integers, Qt Creator's
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
debugger displays the contents of a QHash or QMap in an orderly manner.
Also, the debugger displays access data for QFileInfo and provides
2008-12-04 17:27:29 +01:00
access to the "real" contents of QVariant.
2010-03-30 13:46:39 +03:00
You can use the \gui{Locals and Watchers} view to change the contents of
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
variables of simple data types, for example, \c int or \c float when the
2010-03-30 13:46:39 +03:00
program is interrupted. To do so, click the \gui Value column, modify
the value with the inplace editor, and press \key Enter (or \key Return).
2009-03-24 10:01:00 +01:00
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\note The set of watched items is saved in your session.
2008-12-04 17:27:29 +01:00
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
*/
2010-03-09 16:36:54 +05:30
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
/*!
\contentspage index.html
2010-04-28 16:20:24 +02:00
\previouspage creator-debugging-cpp.html
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\page creator-debugging-example.html
\nextpage creator-debug-mode.html
2010-03-09 16:36:54 +05:30
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\title Debugging the Example Application
This section uses the \l{Creating a Qt C++ Application}{TextFinder} example to
illustrate how to debug applications in the \gui Debug mode. TextFinder
reads a text file into
QString and then displays it with QTextEdit.
To look at the example QString, \c{line}, and see the
stored data, place a breakpoint and view the QString object
data, as follows:
2010-03-09 16:36:54 +05:30
\list 1
\o Click in between the line number and the window border on the line
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
where we invoke \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qtextedit.html#plainText-prop}{setPlainText()}
2010-03-09 16:36:54 +05:30
to set a breakpoint.
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\image qtcreator-setting-breakpoint1.png
2010-03-09 16:36:54 +05:30
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\o Select \gui{Debug > Start Debugging > Start Debugging} or press \key{F5}.
2010-03-09 16:36:54 +05:30
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\o To view the breakpoint, click the \gui{Breakpoints} tab.
\image qtcreator-setting-breakpoint2.png
\o To remove a breakpoint, right-click it and select \gui{Delete Breakpoint}.
\o To view the contents of \c{line}, go to the \gui{Locals and
2010-03-09 16:36:54 +05:30
Watchers} view.
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\image qtcreator-watcher.png
\endlist
2010-03-09 16:36:54 +05:30
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
Modify the \c{on_findButton_clicked()} function to move back to
2010-03-09 16:36:54 +05:30
the start of the document and continue searching once the cursor hits the
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
end of the document. Add the following code snippet:
2010-03-09 16:36:54 +05:30
\code
void TextFinder::on_findButton_clicked()
{
QString searchString = ui->lineEdit->text();
QTextDocument *document = ui->textEdit->document();
QTextCursor cursor = ui->textEdit->textCursor();
cursor = document->find(searchString, cursor,
QTextDocument::FindWholeWords);
ui->textEdit->setTextCursor(cursor);
bool found = cursor.isNull();
if (!found && previouslyFound) {
int ret = QMessageBox::question(this, tr("End of Document"),
tr("I have reached the end of the document. Would you like "
"me to start searching from the beginning of the document?"),
QMessageBox::Yes | QMessageBox::No, QMessageBox::Yes);
if (ret == QMessageBox::Yes) {
cursor = document->find(searchString,
QTextDocument::FindWholeWords);
ui->textEdit->setTextCursor(cursor);
} else
return;
}
previouslyFound = found;
}
\endcode
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
If you compile and run the above code, however, the application does not
work correctly due to a logic error. To locate this logic error, step
2010-03-09 16:36:54 +05:30
through the code using the following buttons:
\image qtcreator-debugging-buttons.png
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
*/
2010-03-09 16:36:54 +05:30
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-debugger-engines.html
\page creator-debugging-helpers.html
2010-04-28 16:20:24 +02:00
\nextpage creator-debugging-qml.html
2010-03-09 16:36:54 +05:30
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\title Using Debugging Helpers
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
\section1 Debugging Helper Library with C++
2009-04-16 16:24:38 +02:00
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
While debugging, Qt Creator dynamically loads a helper library into your
2009-04-17 15:35:47 +02:00
program. This helper library enables Qt Creator to pretty print Qt and STL
types. The Qt SDK package already contains a prebuilt debugging helper
2010-03-30 13:46:39 +03:00
library. To create your own debugging helper library, select \gui{Tools} >
2010-03-18 15:13:45 +05:30
\gui{Options...} > \gui{Qt4} > \gui{Qt Versions}. As the internal data
structures of Qt can change between versions, the debugging helper
library is built for each Qt version.
2009-04-16 16:24:38 +02:00
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
\section1 Debugging Helper Library with Python
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
With the gdb Python version, you can
use debugging helpers also for user defined types. To do so,
2010-03-30 13:46:39 +03:00
define one Python function per user defined type in \c{.gdbinit}.
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
The function name has to be qdump__NS__Foo, where NS::Foo is the class
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
or class template to be examined. Nested namespaces are possible.
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
The debugger plugin calls this function whenever you want to
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
display an object of this type. The function is passed the following
parameters:
\list
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\o \c d of type \c Dumper
\o \c item of type \c Item
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
\endlist
The function has to feed the Dumper object with certain information
which is used to build up the object and its children's display in the
\gui{Locals and Watchers} view.
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
Example:
\code
def qdump__QVector(d, item):
d_ptr = item.value["d"]
p_ptr = item.value["p"]
alloc = d_ptr["alloc"]
size = d_ptr["size"]
check(0 <= size and size <= alloc and alloc <= 1000 * 1000 * 1000)
check(d_ptr["ref"]["_q_value"] > 0)
innerType = item.value.type.template_argument(0)
d.putItemCount(size)
d.putNumChild(size)
if d.isExpanded(item):
p = gdb.Value(p_ptr["array"]).cast(innerType.pointer())
d.beginChildren([size, 2000], innerType)
for i in d.childRange():
d.safePutItem(Item(p.dereference(), item.iname, i))
p += 1
d.endChildren()
\endcode
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\section2 Item Python Class
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
The Item Python class is a thin wrapper around values corresponding to one
line in the \gui{Locals and Watchers} view. The Item members are as follows :
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
\list
\o \gui{__init__(self, value, parentiname, iname, name = None)} - A
constructor. The object's internal name is created by concatenating
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
\c parentiname and \c iname. If \c None is passed as \c name, a
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
serial number is used.
\o \gui{value} - An object of type gdb.Value representing the value to
be displayed.
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
\o \gui{iname} - The internal name of the object, constituting a dot-separated
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
list of identifiers, corresponding to the position of the object's
representation in the view.
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
\o \gui{name} - An optional name. If given, is used in the
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
\gui{name} column of the view. If not, a simple number in brackets
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
is used instead.
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
\endlist
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\section2 Dumper Python Class
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
For each line in the \gui{Locals and Watchers} view, a string like the
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
following needs to be created and channeled to the debugger plugin.
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
\code
"{iname='some internal name',
addr='object address in memory',
name='contents of the name column',
value='contents of the value column',
type='contents of the type column',
numchild='number of children', // zero/nonzero is sufficient
childtype='default type of children', // optional
childnumchild='default number of grandchildren', // optional
children=[ // only needed if item is expanded in view
{iname='internal name of first child',
... },
{iname='internal name of second child',
... },
...
]}"
\endcode
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
While in theory, you can build up the entire string above manually, it is
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
easier to employ the Dumper Python class for that purpose. The Dumper
Python class contains a complete framework to take care of the \c iname and
\c addr fields, to handle children of simple types, references, pointers,
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
enums, known and unknown structs as well as some convenience methods to
handle common situations.
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
The Dumper members are the following:
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
\list
\o \gui{__init__(self)} - Initializes the output to an empty string and
empties the child stack.
\o \gui{put(self, value)} - Low level method to directly append to the
output string.
\o \gui{putCommaIfNeeded(self)} - Appends a comma if the current output
ends in '}', '"' or ']' .
\o \gui{putField(self, name, value)} - Appends a comma if needed, and a
name='value' field.
\o \gui{beginHash(self)} - Appends a comma if needed and a '{', marking
the begin of a set of fields.
\o \gui{endHash(self)} - Appends a '}', marking the end of a set of
fields.
\o \gui{beginItem(self, name)} - Starts writing a field by writing \c {name='}.
\o \gui{endItem(self)} - Ends writing a field by writing \c {'}.
\o \gui{beginChildren(self, numChild_ = 1, childType_ = None, childNumChild_ = None)}
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
- Starts writing a list of \c numChild children, with type
\c childType_ and \c childNumChild_ grandchildren each. If \c numChild_
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
is a list of two integers, the first one specifies the actual number
of children and the second the maximum number of children to print.
\o \gui{endChildren(self)} - Ends writing a list of children.
\o \gui{childRange(self)} - Return the range of children specified in
\c beginChildren.
\o \gui{putItemCount(self, count)} - Appends a field \c {value='<%d items'}
to the output.
\o \gui{putEllipsis(self)} - Appends fields
\c {'{name="<incomplete>",value="",type="",numchild="0"}'}. This is
automatically done by \c endChildren if the number of children to
print is smaller than the number of actual children.
\o \gui{putName(self, name)} - Appends a \c {name='...'} field.
\o \gui{putType(self, type)} - Appends a field \c {type='...'} unless the
\a type coincides with the parent's default child type.
\o \gui{putNumChild(self, numchild)} - Appends a field \c {numchild='...'}
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
unless the \c numchild coincides with the parent's default child numchild
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
value.
\o \gui{putValue(self, value, encoding = None)} - Append a file \c {value='...'},
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
optionally followed by a field \c {valueencoding='...'}. The \c value
2010-02-17 11:12:38 +01:00
needs to be convertible to a string entirely consisting of
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
alphanumerical values. The \c encoding parameter can be used to
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
specify the encoding in case the real value had to be encoded in some
way to meet the alphanumerical-only requirement.
Currently the following encodings are supported:
\list
\o 0: unencoded 8 bit data, interpreted as Latin1.
\o 1: base64 encoded 8 bit data, used for QByteArray,
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
double quotes are added.
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
\o 2: base64 encoded 16 bit data, used for QString,
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
double quotes are added.
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
\o 3: base64 encoded 32 bit data,
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
double quotes are added.
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
\o 4: base64 encoded 16 bit data, without quotes (see 2)
\o 5: base64 encoded 8 bit data, without quotes (see 1)
\o 6: %02x encoded 8 bit data (as with \c QByteArray::toHex),
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
double quotes are added.
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
\o 7: %04x encoded 16 bit data (as with \c QByteArray::toHex),
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
double quotes are added.
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
\endlist
\o \gui{putStringValue(self, value)} - Encodes a QString and calls
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
\c putValue with the correct \c encoding setting.
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
\o \gui{putByteArrayValue(self, value)} - Encodes a QByteArray and calls
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\c putValue with the correct \c encoding setting.
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
\o \gui{isExpanded(self, item)} - Checks whether the item with the
internal name \c item.iname is expanded in the view.
\o \gui{isExpandedIName(self, iname)} - Checks whether the item with the
internal name \c iname is expanded in the view.
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
\o \gui{putIntItem(self, name, value)} - Equivalent to:
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
\code
self.beginHash()
self.putName(name)
self.putValue(value)
self.putType("int")
self.putNumChild(0)
self.endHash()
\endcode
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
\o \gui{putBoolItem(self, name, value)} - Equivalent to:
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
\code
self.beginHash()
self.putName(name)
self.putValue(value)
self.putType("bool")
self.putNumChild(0)
self.endHash()
\endcode
2010-02-17 11:12:38 +01:00
\o \gui{pushOutput(self)} - Moves the output string to a safe location
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
from with it is sent to the debugger plugin even if further operations
2010-02-17 11:12:38 +01:00
raise an exception.
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
\o \gui{putCallItem(self, name, item, func)} -
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
Uses gdb to call the function \c func on the value specified by
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
\a {item.value} and output the resulting item. This function is
not available when debugging core dumps and it is not available
on the Symbian platform due to restrictions imposed by AppTRK.
\o \gui{putItemHelper(self, item)} - The "master function", handling
basic types, references, pointers and enums directly, iterates
over base classes and class members of compound types and calls
\c qdump__* functions whenever appropriate.
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
\o \gui{putItem(self, item)} - Equivalent to:
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\code
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
self.beginHash()
self.putItemHelper(item)
self.endHash()
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\endcode
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
\o \gui{safePutItemHelper(self, item)} - Calls \c putItemHelper(self, item).
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
If an exception is raised, catches it, and replaces all output produced by
\c putItemHelper with the output of:
\code
self.putName(item.name)
self.putValue("<invalid>")
self.putType(str(item.value.type))
self.putNumChild(0)
self.beginChildren()
self.endChildren()
\endcode
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\o \gui{safePutItem(self, item)} - Equivalent to:
\code
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
self.beginHash()
self.safePutItemHelper(item)
self.endHash()
2010-04-12 12:27:59 +02:00
\endcode
2009-12-15 09:38:16 +01:00
\endlist
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
*/
2009-03-31 17:48:14 +02:00
/*!
\contentspage index.html
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\previouspage creator-project-qmake.html
\page creator-project-cmake.html
\nextpage creator-project-generic.html
2009-03-31 17:48:14 +02:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\title Setting Up a CMake Project
2009-04-01 17:48:05 +02:00
2010-03-25 16:31:06 +01:00
CMake is an alternative to qmake for automating the generation of makefiles.
It controls the software compilation process by using simple configuration
files, called CMakeLists.txt files. CMake generates native makefiles and
workspaces that you can use in the compiler environment of your choice.
Since Qt Creator 1.1, CMake configuration files are supported.
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
Qt Creator 1.3 supports the Microsoft Toolchain if the CMake version
2009-11-02 16:17:13 +01:00
is at least 2.8.
2009-05-04 14:18:57 +02:00
2010-03-25 16:31:06 +01:00
\section1 Setting the Path for CMake
2010-03-11 17:36:49 +05:30
You can set the path for the \c CMake executable in \gui{Tools} >
\gui{Options...} > \gui{CMake} > \gui{CMake}.
\image qtcreator-cmakeexecutable.png
\note Before you open a \c CMake project it is necessary to modify the
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
\c{PATH} environment variable to include the bin folders of \c mingw and
2010-03-11 17:36:49 +05:30
Qt Creator in the SDK.
For instance, if you have the Qt Creator SDK installed in your C drive,
use the following command to set the environment variables in
the command line prompt:
\code
set PATH=C:\qtsdk\mingw\bin;C:\qtsdk\qt\bin;
\endcode
Then start Qt Creator by typing:
\code
C:\qtsdk\bin\qtcreator.exe
\endcode
2009-03-31 17:48:14 +02:00
\section1 Opening CMake Projects
2010-03-11 17:36:49 +05:30
To open a \c CMake project:
\list 1
2010-03-25 16:31:06 +01:00
\o Select \gui{File} > \gui{Open File or Project...}.
\o Select the \c{CMakeLists.txt} file from your \c CMake project.
2010-03-11 17:36:49 +05:30
\endlist
2010-03-25 16:31:06 +01:00
A wizard guides you through the rest of the process.
2010-03-11 17:36:49 +05:30
\note If the \c CMake project does not have an in-place build, Qt Creator
lets you specify the directory in which the project is built
(\l{glossary-shadow-build}{shadow build}).
2009-03-31 17:48:14 +02:00
2009-04-17 16:09:54 +02:00
\image qtcreator-cmake-import-wizard1.png
2009-03-31 17:48:14 +02:00
The screenshot below shows how you can specify command line arguments to
2009-04-01 17:48:05 +02:00
\c CMake for your project.
2009-03-31 17:48:14 +02:00
2009-04-17 16:09:54 +02:00
\image qtcreator-cmake-import-wizard2.png
2009-04-01 17:48:05 +02:00
2009-03-31 17:48:14 +02:00
Normally, there is no need to pass any command line arguments for projects
2009-04-01 17:48:05 +02:00
that are already built, as \c CMake caches that information.
2009-03-31 17:48:14 +02:00
\section1 Building CMake Projects
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
Qt Creator builds \c CMake projects by running \c make, \c mingw32-make, or
2009-11-02 16:17:13 +01:00
\c nmake depending on your platform. The build errors and warnings are
parsed and displayed in the \gui{Build Issues} output pane.
2009-03-31 17:48:14 +02:00
2010-03-11 17:36:49 +05:30
By default, Qt Creator builds the \bold{all} target. You can specify which
2009-05-04 14:18:57 +02:00
targets to build in \gui{Project} mode, under \gui{Build Settings}.
2009-03-31 17:48:14 +02:00
2009-04-17 16:09:54 +02:00
\image qtcreator-cmake-build-settings.png
2009-03-31 17:48:14 +02:00
2010-03-11 17:36:49 +05:30
Qt Creator supports multiple build configurations. The build
directory can also be modified after the initial import.
2009-05-04 14:18:57 +02:00
2009-03-31 17:48:14 +02:00
\section1 Running CMake Projects
2009-05-04 14:18:57 +02:00
Qt Creator automatically adds \gui{Run Configurations} for all targets
specified in the \c CMake project file.
2009-03-31 17:48:14 +02:00
2009-04-15 17:28:04 +02:00
Known issues for the current version can be found
2010-03-31 18:06:02 +02:00
\l{Known Issues of version 1.3.84}{here}.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section1 Adding External Libraries to a CMake Project
Through external libraries Qt Creator can support code completion and
syntax highlighting as if they were part of the current project or the Qt
library.
2010-03-11 17:36:49 +05:30
Qt Creator detects the external libraries using the \c FIND_PACKAGE()
macro. Some libraries come with the CMake installation. You can find those
in the \bold{Modules} directory of your CMake installation.
\note If you provide your own libraries, you also need to provide your own
\c FindFoo.cmake file. For more information, see
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\l{http://vtk.org/Wiki/CMake_FAQ#Writing_FindXXX.cmake_files}{CMake FAQ}.
Syntax completion and highlighting work once your project successfully
builds and links against the external library.
2009-03-31 17:48:14 +02:00
*/
2009-04-01 17:48:05 +02:00
/*!
\contentspage index.html
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\previouspage creator-project-cmake.html
\page creator-project-generic.html
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\nextpage creator-developing-maemo.html
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\title Setting Up a Generic Project
Qt Creator supports generic projects, so you can import existing projects
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
that do not use qmake or CMake and Qt Creator ignores your build system.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
Generic project support allows you to use Qt Creator as a code editor. You
can change the way your project is built by modifying the \c make command
in the \gui{Projects} mode under \gui{Build Settings}.
2009-04-01 17:48:05 +02:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
When you import a project, Qt Creator creates the following files that
allow you to specify which files belong to your project and which include
directories or defines you want to pass to your compile:
2010-03-23 10:41:05 +05:30
\tt{.files}, \tt{.includes}, and \tt{.config}.
2009-04-01 17:48:05 +02:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section1 Importing a Generic Project
To import an existing generic project:
\list 1
2010-03-23 10:41:05 +05:30
\o Select \gui File > \gui{New File or Project...} >
\gui{Other Project} > \gui{Import Existing Project}.
\o In \gui{Import Existing Project}, enter the project name
2010-03-30 13:46:39 +03:00
and select the location of the project file you want to import.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
Qt Creator automatically generates the following files in the
project directory:
\list
\o \l{Specifying Files}{.files}
\o \l{Specifying Include Paths}{.includes}
\o \l{Specifying Defines}{.config}
\o .creator
\endlist
\endlist
2010-03-30 13:46:39 +03:00
When the project is successfully imported, Qt Creator creates the project
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
tree in the sidebar.
After importing a generic project into Qt Creator, open it by selecting the
2010-03-23 10:41:05 +05:30
\tt{.creator} file.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section1 Working with Generic Project Files
2009-07-24 16:37:34 +02:00
2009-08-03 14:54:55 +02:00
For a generic project, you have to manually specify which files belong to
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
your project and which include directories or defines you want to pass to
your compiler.
2009-07-24 16:37:34 +02:00
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\section1 Specifying Files
2009-07-24 16:37:34 +02:00
2010-03-23 10:41:05 +05:30
The list of files for a generic project is specified in the \tt{.files}
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
file. When you first create a generic project, Qt Creator adds any
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
files it recognizes to your project.
2010-03-23 10:41:05 +05:30
To add or remove files, edit the \tt{.files} file in Qt Creator.
Qt Creator recreates your project tree when you save the \tt{.files} file.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
Alternatively, you can add and remove files using the context menu in the
project tree.
2009-07-24 16:37:34 +02:00
2010-03-23 10:41:05 +05:30
If you frequently need to update the \tt{.files} file, you can do so
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
efficiently by using a script that updates the file for you. If the file
is modified externally, you have to restart Qt Creator for the changes to
take effect.
2009-08-03 14:54:55 +02:00
2010-05-21 11:56:12 +02:00
To update the \tt{.files} on the \gui Git repository use the following
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
script:
\code
2010-03-26 15:04:50 +05:30
git ls-files *.cpp *.h > MyProject.files
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\endcode
2009-08-03 14:54:55 +02:00
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\section1 Specifying Include Paths
2009-07-24 16:37:34 +02:00
2010-03-23 10:41:05 +05:30
The include paths are specified in the \tt{.includes} file, one include
2009-09-01 14:48:39 +02:00
path per line. The paths can be either absolute or relative to the
2010-03-23 10:41:05 +05:30
\tt{.includes} file.
2009-07-24 16:37:34 +02:00
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\section1 Specifying Defines
2009-07-24 16:37:34 +02:00
2010-03-23 10:41:05 +05:30
The defines are specified in the \tt{.config} file. The \tt{.config} file is
a regular C++ file, prepended to all your source files when they are parsed.
Only use the \tt{.config} file to add lines as in the example below:
2009-07-24 16:37:34 +02:00
2009-08-03 14:54:55 +02:00
\code
2009-07-24 16:37:34 +02:00
#define NAME value
2009-08-03 14:54:55 +02:00
\endcode
2009-07-24 16:37:34 +02:00
2009-09-01 14:48:39 +02:00
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\section1 Creating a Run Configuration
2009-04-01 17:48:05 +02:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
Qt Creator cannot automatically determine which executable to run.
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
In the \gui{Projects} mode under \gui{Run Settings}, define the executable
file to run:
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\list 1
\o Click \gui Add and select \gui{Custom Executable}.
\o Define the configuration name, the location of the executable, any
2010-03-30 13:46:39 +03:00
additional arguments and the working directory.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\endlist
2009-04-01 17:48:05 +02:00
*/
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
/*!
\contentspage index.html
2010-05-18 15:20:04 +02:00
\previouspage creator-build-dependencies.html
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\page creator-visual-editor.html
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\nextpage creator-usability.html
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
2010-03-23 17:33:24 +01:00
\title Developing Qt Quick Applications
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
2010-03-23 17:33:24 +01:00
You can either create Qt Quick projects from scratch or import them to
2010-03-24 17:21:14 +01:00
Qt Creator. For example, you can import and run the
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qdeclarativeexamples.html} {QML examples and demos}
2010-03-24 17:21:14 +01:00
to learn how to use various aspects of QML.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
2010-04-12 17:07:25 +02:00
You can use the code editor (\gui Edit mode) or the visual editor
(\gui Design mode) to develop Qt Quick applications.
2010-04-22 12:08:57 +02:00
\note The \QMLD visual editor is provided as an experimental plugin that you must
2010-04-12 17:07:25 +02:00
enable to be able to edit QML files in the \gui Design mode. Enabling the
visual editor can negatively affect the overall stability of Qt Creator.
To enable or disable the \QMLD visual editor, select
\gui {Help > About Plugins... > Qt Quick > QmlDesigner}. You must restart Qt Creator
to enable or disable the visual editor.
2010-03-23 17:33:24 +01:00
\section1 Creating Qt Quick Projects
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
2010-04-07 15:05:31 +02:00
Select \gui {File > New File or Project > Qt Quick Project > Qt QML Application}.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\QMLD creates the following files:
\list
\o .qmlproject project file defines that all QML, JavaScript, and image
files in the project folder belong to the project. Therefore, you do not
need to individually list all the files in the project.
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
\o .qml file defines an element, such as a component, screen, or the whole
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
application UI.
\endlist
2010-03-23 17:33:24 +01:00
The \c import statement in the beginning of the .qml file specifies the
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qdeclarativemodules.html} {Qt modules}
2010-03-23 17:33:24 +01:00
to import to \QMLD. Each Qt module contains a set of default elements.
Specify a version to get the features you want.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
To use JavaScript and image files in the application, copy them to the
project folder.
To import a QML project to Qt Creator, select
2010-03-18 10:50:20 +01:00
\gui {File > New File or Project > Qt Quick Project > Import Existing Qt QML Directory}.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\section1 Designing Application UI
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
One .qml file can define a component, screen, or the whole application.
\section2 Creating Components
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
A QML component provides a way of defining a new type that you can re-use in other QML
files. A component is like a black box; it interacts with the outside world
through properties, signals, and slots, and is generally defined in its own QML file.
You can import components to screens and applications.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
You can use the \gui Library items to create components. Drag and drop
2010-04-07 15:05:31 +02:00
the following QML elements to the editor and modify their properties in the \gui Properties pane:
\list
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-borderimage.html}{Border Image}
2010-04-22 12:08:57 +02:00
uses an image as a border or background.
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-image.html}{Image}
2010-04-07 15:05:31 +02:00
adds a bitmap to the scene. You can stretch and tile images.
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-item.html}{Item}
2010-04-07 15:05:31 +02:00
is the most basic of all visual items in QML. Even though it has no visual appearance,
it defines all the properties that are common across visual items, such as the x and
y position, width and height, anchoring, and key handling.
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-rectangle.html}{Rectangle}
2010-04-07 15:05:31 +02:00
adds a rectangle that is painted with a solid fill color and an optional border.
You can also use the radius property to create rounded rectangles.
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-text.html}{Text}
2010-04-07 15:05:31 +02:00
adds formatted read-only text.
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-textedit.html}{Text Edit}
2010-04-07 15:05:31 +02:00
adds a single line of editable formatted text that can be validated.
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-textinput.html}{Text Input}
2010-04-07 15:05:31 +02:00
adds a single line of editable plain text that can be validated.
\endlist
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
2010-04-22 12:08:57 +02:00
You can use QML to add properties for a component in the code editor.
The following sections describe some use cases for the QML elements.
\section3 Creating Buttons
To create a button component:
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
\list 1
\o Select \gui {File > New File or Project > Qt > Qt QML File} to create a QML file
2010-04-22 12:08:57 +02:00
called Button.qml (for example).
2010-04-07 15:05:31 +02:00
\note Components are listed in the \gui Library pane only if the filename begins
with a capital letter.
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
\o Double-click the file to open it in the code editor.
\o Click \gui {Design} to edit the file in the visual editor.
\o Drag and drop a \gui Rectangle from the \gui Library pane to the scene.
2010-03-19 17:02:36 +01:00
\o In the \gui Properties pane, modify the appearance of the button.
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
2010-03-19 17:02:36 +01:00
\list a
\o In the \gui Color field, select the button color.
\o In the \gui Radius field, use
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
the slider to set the radius of the rectangle and produce rounded corners for the button.
2010-03-19 17:02:36 +01:00
\endlist
2010-03-23 17:33:24 +01:00
\o Drag and drop a \gui {Text} item on top of the \gui Rectangle. This creates a
nested element where \gui Rectangle is the parent element of \gui Text. Elements
are positioned relative to their parents.
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
2010-03-23 17:33:24 +01:00
\o In the \gui Properties pane, edit the properties of the \gui Text item.
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
2010-03-19 17:02:36 +01:00
\list a
\o In the \gui Text field, type \bold Button.
You can select the text color, font, size, and style in the \gui Font section.
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
\o In the \gui Alignment field, select the center button to align the text to the
center of the button.
2010-03-19 17:02:36 +01:00
\o Click \gui {Geometry}, and then click the
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
\inlineimage qmldesigner-anchor-fill-screen.png
button to anchor the text to the whole button area.
2010-03-19 17:02:36 +01:00
\endlist
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
\o Click \gui Edit to edit the \c width and \c height properties of the button
to fit the button size.
\o Press \key {Ctrl+S} to save the button.
\image qmldesigner-button.png "Button component"
2010-05-21 12:13:50 +02:00
\o Click the \gui Run button to view the button in \QQV.
2010-04-22 12:08:57 +02:00
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
\endlist
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
2010-04-22 12:08:57 +02:00
To create a graphical button that scales beautifully without using vector graphics,
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
use the \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-borderimage.html}{Border Image}
2010-04-22 12:08:57 +02:00
element.
\section3 Creating Scalable Buttons and Borders
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
You can use the \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-borderimage.html}{Border Image}
2010-04-22 12:08:57 +02:00
element to display an image, such as a PNG file, as a border and a background.
Use two Border Image elements and suitable graphics to make it look like the button
is pushed down when it is clicked. One of the Border Image elements is visible by default.
You can specify that it is hidden and the other one becomes visible when the mouse is clicked.
2010-04-29 17:01:50 +02:00
Add a MouseArea that covers the whole area and emits the clicked signal (\c {parent.clicked()})
2010-04-22 12:08:57 +02:00
when it detects a mouse click.
You can add text to the button and set it up as a property. The text can then be initialized
from the outside, making the button a reusable UI component. The font size is also available in case
the default size is too big. You can scale down the button text and use smooth text rendering
for some extra quality.
\image qmldesigner-borderimage.png "Graphical button"
To create a graphical button:
\list 1
\o Select \gui {File > New File or Project > Qt > Qt QML File} to create a QML file
called Button.qml (for example).
\o Double-click the file to open it in the code editor.
2010-04-29 17:01:50 +02:00
\o Replace the \gui Rectangle with an \gui Item, as illustrated by the
following code snippet:
\code
Item {
}
\endcode
2010-04-22 12:08:57 +02:00
\o Click \gui {Design} to edit the file in the visual editor.
2010-04-29 17:01:50 +02:00
\o Drag and drop two \gui BorderImage items from the \gui Library pane to
the scene.
\o Drag and drop a \gui Text item to the scene.
\o Drag and drop a \gui MouseArea to the screen.
\o Click \gui Edit to specify properties for the \gui Item, as
illustrated by the following code snippet:
\code
property string text: ""
property int fontSize: 44
signal clicked
\endcode
\o In the \gui Navigator view, select \gui borderimage1 to specify
settings for it in the \gui Properties pane:
2010-04-22 12:08:57 +02:00
2010-04-29 17:01:50 +02:00
\list a
\o In the \gui Source field, select the image file for the
button, for example button_up.png.
\o In the \gui Left, \gui Right, \gui Top, and \gui Bottom fields,
enter 32 to set the margins for the image.
\o Click \gui {Geometry}, and then click the
\inlineimage qmldesigner-anchor-fill-screen.png
button to anchor the border image to the \gui Item.
\o Click \gui Advanced, and select \gui {Set Expression} in the menu
next to the \gui Visibility check box.
\o Enter the following expression to specify that the image is visible
when the mouse is not pressed down: \c {!mousearea1.pressed}.
2010-04-22 12:08:57 +02:00
2010-04-29 17:01:50 +02:00
\endlist
\o Select \gui borderimage2 to specify similar settings for it:
2010-04-22 12:08:57 +02:00
\list a
2010-04-29 17:01:50 +02:00
\o In the \gui Source field, select the image file for the
button when it is clicked, for example button_down.png.
2010-04-22 12:08:57 +02:00
2010-04-29 17:01:50 +02:00
\o In the \gui Left, \gui Right, \gui Top, and \gui Bottom fields,
enter 32 to set the margins for the image.
2010-04-22 12:08:57 +02:00
2010-04-29 17:01:50 +02:00
\o Click \gui {Geometry}, and then click the
\inlineimage qmldesigner-anchor-fill-screen.png
button to anchor the border image to the \gui Item.
2010-04-22 12:08:57 +02:00
2010-04-29 17:01:50 +02:00
\o Click \gui Advanced, and set the following epression for
\gui Visibility, to specify that the the image is visible
when the mouse is pressed down: \c {mousearea1.pressed}.
2010-04-22 12:08:57 +02:00
2010-04-29 17:01:50 +02:00
\endlist
2010-04-22 12:08:57 +02:00
2010-04-29 17:01:50 +02:00
\o Select \gui Text to specify font size and color, and text
scaling and rendering:
2010-04-22 12:08:57 +02:00
2010-04-29 17:01:50 +02:00
\list a
2010-04-22 12:08:57 +02:00
2010-04-29 17:01:50 +02:00
\o In the \gui Color field, use the color picker to select
the font color, or enter a value in the field.
2010-04-22 12:08:57 +02:00
2010-04-29 17:01:50 +02:00
\o In the \gui Text field, select \gui {Set Expression} and
enter a pointer to the \c {text} property that you specified
earlier: \c {parent.txt}.
\o In the \gui Size field, select \gui {Pixel} to specify
the font size in pixels. By default, the size is specified in
points.
\o In the \gui Size field, select \gui {Set Expression} and
enter a pointer to the \c {fontSize} property that you specified
earlier.
\o Select the \gui Smooth check box to enable smooth text
rendering.
\o Click \gui {Geometry}, and then click the
\inlineimage qmldesigner-center-in.png "Anchor buttons"
buttons to inherit the vertical and horizontal centering from
the parent.
\o Click \gui Advanced to specify scaling for the text in the
\gui Scale field.
\o Select \gui {Set Expression} and enter the following expression:
\c {if (!mousearea1.pressed) { 1 } else { 0.95 }}.
\note You can enter long and complicated expressions also in the
code editor.
2010-04-22 12:08:57 +02:00
\endlist
2010-04-29 17:01:50 +02:00
\o In the code editor, add to the \c MouseArea item
a pointer to the \c clicked expression that you added earlier:
\c {onClicked: parent.clicked()}.
2010-05-21 12:13:50 +02:00
\o Click the \gui Run button to view the button in \QQV.
2010-04-29 17:01:50 +02:00
\endlist
2010-04-07 15:05:31 +02:00
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\section2 Creating Screens
2010-04-07 15:05:31 +02:00
You can use the \gui Library items and your own components to create screens.
You can create the following types of views to organize items provided by
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qdeclarativemodels.html}{data models}:
2010-04-07 15:05:31 +02:00
\list
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-gridview.html}{Grid View}
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-listview.html}{List View}
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-pathview.html}{Path View}
2010-04-07 15:05:31 +02:00
\endlist
In the code editor, write the code to use the data models.
Use states and transitions
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
to navigate between screens.
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
QML states typically describe user interface configurations, such as the UI elements,
2010-04-07 15:05:31 +02:00
their properties and behavior and the available actions. For example, you can use
states to create two screens:
2010-03-23 17:33:24 +01:00
\list 1
2010-03-24 17:21:14 +01:00
\o Use the \gui Library items, resources and your own components to create a screen.
2010-04-07 15:05:31 +02:00
For example, drag and drop the button component from the \gui Library pane to the screen.
2010-03-23 17:33:24 +01:00
\o In the \gui State pane, click the plus sign to add another view, or \e state
to the application.
\o Modify the second state of the screen to create a new screen.
\endlist
2010-04-22 12:08:57 +02:00
\section3 Creating List Views
You use list views and list models to create lists. You use delegates to handle list items.
Typically, the list model is provided by a QAbstractListModel C++ model object,
but you can also create it in QML.
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
2010-04-22 12:08:57 +02:00
\list 1
\o Select \gui {File > New File or Project > Qt > Qt QML File} to create a QML file
called ListView.qml (for example).
\o Double-click the file to open it in the code editor.
\o Add a list model that contains the data to be shown on the list, as
illustrated by the following code snippet:
\code
2010-04-23 13:38:16 +02:00
import Qt 4.7
2010-04-22 12:08:57 +02:00
Rectangle {
width: 360
height: 640
ListModel {
id: myListModel
ListElement {
item_index: 0
item_name: "Item 1"
item_description: "Description 1"
}
ListElement {
item_index: 1
item_name: "Item 2"
item_description: "Description 2"
}
ListElement {
item_index: 2
item_name: "Item 3"
item_description: "Description 3"
}
}
\endcode
\o Add a delegate that draws each item in the list.
\code
Component {
id: myListDelegate
Item {
id: wrapper
width: parent.width
height: 40
Column {
x: 5; y: 5
Text { text: '<b>Name:</b> ' + item_name }
Text { text: '<b>Descriptionr:</b> ' + item_description }
}
MouseArea {
anchors.fill: parent
onClicked: myList.currentIndex = item_index
}
}
}
\endcode
You can use a separate delegate to hilight the currently selected item.
\code
Component {
id: myListHilight
Rectangle {
width: parent.width
height: 40
color: "lightsteelblue"
radius: 5
SpringFollow on y {
to: myList.currentItem.y
spring: 3
damping: 0.2
}
}
}
\endcode
\o Add the list view, as illustrated by the following code snippet:
\code
ListView {
id: myList
width: parent.width; height: parent.height
model: myListModel
delegate: myListDelegate
highlight: myListHilight
focus: true
}
}
\endcode
2010-05-21 12:13:50 +02:00
\o Click the \gui Run button to view the list view in \QQV.
2010-04-22 12:08:57 +02:00
\endlist
\section2 Navigating Between Screens
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
2010-04-22 12:08:57 +02:00
To make movement between states smooth, you can specify transitions.
2010-03-23 17:33:24 +01:00
You can use different types of animated transitions. For example, you can animate changes
to property values and colors. You can use rotation animation to control the direction of
2010-04-22 12:08:57 +02:00
rotation. For more information, see
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qdeclarativeanimation.html}{QML Animation}.
2010-03-23 17:33:24 +01:00
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
You can use the \c ParallelAnimation element to start several animations at the same time.
Or use the \c SequentialAnimation element to run them one after another.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
\section2 Adding User Interaction Methods
2010-04-07 15:05:31 +02:00
You can add the following basic interaction methods to scenes:
\list
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-flickable.html}{Flickable}
2010-04-07 15:05:31 +02:00
items can be flicked horizontally or vertically.
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-flipable.html}{Flipable}
2010-04-07 15:05:31 +02:00
items can be flipped between their front and back sides by using rotation,
state, and transition.
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-focusscope.html}{Focus Scope}
2010-04-07 15:05:31 +02:00
assists in keyboard focus handling when building reusable QML components.
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\o \l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-mousearea.html}{Mouse Area}
2010-04-07 15:05:31 +02:00
enables simple mouse handling.
\endlist
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
To add interaction methods, drag and drop a \gui {Focus Scope} or \gui {Mouse Area}
to the screen. In the code editor, add signal handlers to execute when users select
2010-03-30 13:46:39 +03:00
the scope or area. Signal handlers allow actions to be taken in response to an event.
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
For instance, the \gui {MouseArea} element has signal handlers to handle mouse press,
release, and click.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\section1 Implementing Application Logic
2010-03-17 16:27:07 +01:00
A user interface is only a part of an application, and not really useful by itself.
2010-03-24 17:21:14 +01:00
You can use Qt or JavaScript to implement the application logic. For more information on
using JavaScript, see
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qdeclarativejavascript.html} {Integrating JavaScript}.
2010-03-24 17:21:14 +01:00
For an example of how to use JavaScript to develop a game, see the
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\l {http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/qml-advtutorial.html} {QML Advanced Tutorial}.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\previouspage creator-project-generic.html
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\page creator-developing-maemo.html
\nextpage creator-developing-symbian.html
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\title Setting Up Development Environment for Maemo
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
Maemo is a software platform developed by Nokia for smartphones and
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
Internet Tablets. The Maemo SDK provides an open development environment
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
for different applications on top of the Maemo platform. The necessary
tools from the Maemo SDK are also included in the Nokia Qt SDK.
The whole tool chain that you need to create, build, debug, run, and deploy
Maemo applictions is installed and configured when you install the Nokia
Qt SDK.
Maemo 5 is based on the Linux 2.6 operating system. For more
information about the Maemo platform, see
\l{http://maemo.org/intro/platform/}{Software Platform} on the Maemo web site.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\section1 Hardware and Software Requirements
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
To build and run Qt applications for Maemo, you need the following:
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\list
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\o Nokia N900 device with PR1.2 or later installed.
\o MADDE cross-platform Maemo development
tool (installed as part of the Nokia Qt SDK).
2010-03-18 11:36:24 +05:30
For more information about MADDE pertaining to its
installation, configuration, and deployment on the device, see
2010-04-01 15:43:29 +02:00
\l{http://wiki.maemo.org/MADDE}{Introduction to MADDE}.
2010-03-18 11:36:24 +05:30
2010-05-07 14:55:19 +02:00
\o Nokia USB drivers.
2010-03-18 11:36:24 +05:30
2010-05-07 14:55:19 +02:00
Only needed if you develop on Windows and if you use a USB connection
to run applications on the device. The drivers are
installed as part of the Nokia Qt SDK. You can also download them from
\l{https://garage.maemo.org/frs/?group_id=801&release_id=2655}{PC Connectivity}
on the Maemo web site. Download and install the latest
PC_Connectivity_<version>.exe (at the time of writing,
PC_Connectivity_0.9.4.exe).
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-04-01 15:43:29 +02:00
\o Qt installed on the device. Recent images should have Qt pre-installed.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\endlist
The Qt Creator/MADDE integration is supported on the following platforms:
\list
\o Linux (32 bit and 64 bit)
\o Windows (32 bit and 64 bit)
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\omit \o Mac OS 10.5 Leopard, or higher \endomit
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\endlist
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\note The only supported build system for Maemo in Qt
2010-04-21 15:04:07 +02:00
Creator is qmake.
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\section1 Setting Up the Nokia N900
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
You can connect your device to your development PC using either a USB or
2010-03-18 11:36:24 +05:30
WLAN connection.
For the device, you need to use a tool called Mad Developer to create the
device-side end point for USB and WLAN connections. It provides no
diagnostics functions but is essential for creating connections between the
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
device and your development PC.
2010-03-18 11:36:24 +05:30
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
To use a WLAN connection, you must activate WLAN on the device and connect
it to the same WLAN as the development PC. The network address is displayed
in the Mad Developer.
To use an USB connection, you need to set up the Nokia N900 as a network device
on the development PC.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\note If you plan to connect your development PC to the Nokia N900 only over WLAN, you can
2010-03-18 11:36:24 +05:30
ignore the USB-specific parts in the following sections.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\section2 Installing and Configuring Mad Developer
2010-03-18 11:36:24 +05:30
To install Mad Developer on your device, you need to add an application
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
catalogue to the list of catalogues your device checks for
2010-03-18 11:36:24 +05:30
installable software, and install the actual Mad Developer software
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
package. After the installation, you must start Mad Developer and configure
a connection between the development PC and the device.
To install and configure Mad Developer:
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\list 1
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\o On the Nokia N900, select \gui {Application manager > Application catalogs
> New}.
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\o Specify the following settings:
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\image qtcreator-app-manager-extras-devel-screenshot.png
\list a
\o \gui {Catalogue name}: \bold devel
\o \gui {Web address}:
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\l http://repository.maemo.org/extras-devel
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\o \gui Distribution: \bold fremantle
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\o \gui Components: \bold {free non-free}
2010-03-18 11:36:24 +05:30
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\endlist
2010-03-18 11:36:24 +05:30
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\o Click \gui Save to add the catalogue.
2010-03-18 11:36:24 +05:30
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\o Select \gui{Download} > \gui{Development} > \gui{mad-developer}
to install the Mad Developer software package.
\o Click \gui {Mad Developer} to start the Mad Developer application.
2010-03-18 11:36:24 +05:30
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\o To use a WLAN connection, activate WLAN on the device and connect
to the same network as the development PC. You can see the network
address in the \gui wlan0 field.
\o To use an USB connection:
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\list a
\o If you are using Microsoft Windows as development host, you must
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
change the driver loaded for instantiating the connection.
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
In the Mad Developer, select \gui{Manage USB} and select \gui{Load g_ether}.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\o To set up the USB settings, click \gui Edit on the \gui usb0 row and
confirm by clicking \gui Configure.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\note By default, you do not need to make changes. The \gui usb0 row
2010-03-18 11:36:24 +05:30
displays the IP address 192.168.2.15.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\endlist
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\o Select \gui{Developer Password} to generate a password for a freshly
created user called \bold developer. The password stays valid for as long
as the password generation dialog is open. You enter the password when
you configure the connection in Qt Creator.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-03-18 11:36:24 +05:30
\image qtcreator-mad-developer-screenshot.png
\endlist
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\section1 Setting Up Network Connectivity on Development PC
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
Use the network configuration tools on your platform to specify the
connection to the device on the development PC. You need to do this
only if you use an USB connection.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
\section2 Linux
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-03-18 11:36:24 +05:30
The device uses the IP address 192.168.2.15 with the subnet 255.255.255.0
for its USB connection by default, so you can create the network interface
with a different address inside the same subnet too.
\note If you have changed the IP address of the device when configuring
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
Mad Developer, you need to reflect those changes in your development PC USB
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
network settings.
2010-03-18 11:36:24 +05:30
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
Run the following command in a shell as root user:
\c{ifconfig usb0 192.168.2.14 up}
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
\section2 Windows
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-03-18 11:36:24 +05:30
When you connect the device to your Windows PC, Windows tries to install a
driver for the Linux USB Ethernet connection. In the
\gui{Found New Hardware Wizard}, select \gui{No, not this time} in the
first dialog and \gui{Install the software automatically} in the second
dialog.
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
To specify a network connection:
\list 1
\o Open the Network Connections window.
2010-03-18 11:36:24 +05:30
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\o Select the Linux USB Ethernet
connection that is displayed as a new Local Area Connection.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\o Edit the \gui {Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)} properties
to specify the IP address for the connection.
In the \gui {Use the following IP address} field, enter the following values:
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\list
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\o \gui {IP Address}: \bold {192.168.2.14}
\o \gui SubnetMask: \bold {255.255.255.0}
\o \gui {Default gateway}: leave this field empty
\endlist
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\endlist
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
Depending on
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
your version of Microsoft Windows you may have to unplug and re-plug the
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
Nokia N900 to reload the driver with its configuration accordingly.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\section1 Setting Up MADDE
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
If you install Nokia Qt SDK, the MADDE package is installed and
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
configured automatically on your development PC and you can omit this task.
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\list 1
\o Download the MADDE installer file for your platform from the
\l{http://wiki.maemo.org/MADDE}{MADDE} site.
\o Execute the installer and follow the instructions.
\o To see which targets are available, run \c{mad-admin list targets}.
\o To install the target that starts with the string \bold fremantle, use the command:
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
\c{mad-admin create fremantle-qt-xxx}
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\o In Qt Creator, register the MADDE tool chain:
\image qtcreator-screenshot-toolchain.png
\list a
\o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Qt4 > \gui{Qt Versions}.
\o Click \inlineimage qtcreator-windows-add.png,
to add a new Qt version.
The \gui{qmake Location} is the qmake
executable in \c{<MADDE dir>/targets/<fremantle target>/bin}.
\endlist
\endlist
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
When you have installed the target, you have a toolchain and a sysroot
2010-04-01 15:43:29 +02:00
environment for cross-compiling.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\section1 Configuring Connections in Qt Creator
To be able to run and debug applications on the Maemo emulator and
devices, you must set up a connection to the emulator and the device in the
Qt Creator build and run settings. If you install Nokia Qt SDK, the
necessary software is installed and configured automatically and you
only need to configure a connection to the device.
You can protect the connections between Qt Creator and the Maemo emulator
or a device by using either a password or an SSH key. You must always
use a password for the initial connection, but can then deploy an SSH
key and use it for subsequent connections. If you use a password, you
must generate it in Mad Developer and enter it in Qt Creator every time
you connect to the Maemo emulator or to a device.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
If you do not have an SSH key, you can create it in Qt Creator. For more
information, see \l{Generating SSH Keys}.
To configure connections between Qt Creator and the Maemo emulator or
device:
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-03-17 19:51:26 +05:30
\list 1
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\o If you install the Maemo emulator (QEMU) separately, you must
specify parameters to access it:
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\list a
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\o Start Mad Developer in the emulator.
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\o Click \gui {Developer Password} to generate a password for
the connection.
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\o In Qt Creator, select \gui {Tools > Options... > Projects >
Maemo Device Configurations > Add} to add a new configuration.
\image qtcreator-maemo-emulator-connection.png
\o In the \gui {Configuration name} field, enter a name for
the connection.
2010-05-14 15:45:43 +02:00
\o In the \gui {Device type} field, select \gui {Maemo emulator}.
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\o In the \gui {Authentication type} field, select \gui Password
for the initial connection.
\o In the \gui Password field, enter the password from the Mad
Developer for the initial connection.
You can use the default values for the other fields.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\o Click \gui Test to test the connection.
\o To avoid having to specify the password every time you connect
to the Maemo emulator, click \gui {Deploy Key...} and select
the file that contains your public key.
\o When you have deployed the key to the device, change the
configuration to use the SSH key for protection.
\image qtcreator-maemo-emulator-connection-key.png
The default location of the private key file is displayed in the
\gui {Private key file} field.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\endlist
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
If you installed the Nokia Qt SDK, a connection has been configured
and you only need to specify the password and deploy the SSH key.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\o To deploy applications and run them remotely, specify parameters
for accessing devices:
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\list a
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\o Connect your device to the development PC via an USB cable or
a WLAN. For an USB connection, you are prompted to select the mode
to use. Choose \gui{PC suite mode}.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\note If you experience connection problems due to a USB port issue,
switch to a different port or use WLAN to connect to the device.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Projects >
\gui{Maemo Device Configurations > Add}, and add a new configuration for a
\gui {Remote device}.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\image qtcreator-screenshot-devconf.png
\o In the \gui {Host name} field, enter the IP address from the
\gui usb0 or \gui wlan0 field in Mad Developer.
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\o Specify the other settings in the same way as for a Maemo emulator
connection.
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\o Click \gui Test to test the connection.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\o Click \gui OK to close the dialog.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\endlist
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\o To specify build and run settings:
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\list a
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\o Open a project for an application you want to develop for your
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
Nokia N900.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\o Click \gui Projects to open the projects mode.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\o In the \gui{Build Settings} section, choose the MADDE Qt version.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\image qtcreator-screenshot-build-settings.png
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\o In the \gui{Run Settings} section, click \gui Add to add a new
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
run configuration.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\o Set a name and select the device configuration.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\image qtcreator-screenshot-run-settings.png
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\note You can either add separate run settings for both the Maemo
emulator connection and the device connection or select the
\gui {Device configuration} before you run the application.
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\endlist
\endlist
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
\section2 Generating SSH Keys
If you do not have an SSH public and private key pair, you can generate it
in Qt Creator. You can specify key length and the key algorithm, RSA or DSA.
If you only use the keys to protect connections to the Maemo emulator or
device, you can use the default values.
\list 1
\o Select \gui {Tools > Options... > Projects > Maemo Device Configurations
> Generate SSH Key...}.
\o Click \gui {Generate SSH Key}.
\image qtcreator-ssh-key-configuration.png "SSH Key Configuration dialog"
\o Click \gui {Save Public Key...} to select the location to save the
public key.
\o Click \gui {Save Private Key...} to specify the location to save the
private key.
\o Click \gui Close to close the dialog.
\endlist
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
*/
2010-05-06 17:25:49 +02:00
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-usability.html
\page creator-maemo-emulator.html
\nextpage creator-debugging.html
\title Using the Maemo Emulator
The Maemo emulator emulates the Nokia N900 device environment. You can test
applications in conditions practically identical to running the application
on a Nokia N900 device. You can test user interaction by using the keypad and
touch emulation.
\note The Maemo emulator support requires the Nokia N900 PR1.2 update.
To test the application UI, user interaction with the application, and
functionality that uses the mobility APIs, use the Qt Simulator,
instead. For more information, see the
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/qt-simulator-beta/index.html}{Qt Simulator Manual}.
The Maemo emulator is installed and configured as part of the Nokia Qt SDK
package. You can also install and configure the MADDE environment and
Maemo emulator separately. For more information, see
\l{Setting Up Development Environment for Maemo}.
\section1 Starting the Maemo Emulator
The \gui {Start Maemo Emulator} button is visible if you have a project
open in Qt Creator for which you have added the Maemo build target.
To start the Maemo emulator:
\list 1
\o Click
\inlineimage qtcreator-maemo-emulator-button.png "Start Maemo Emulator button"
.
\o Select \gui {Mad Developer} on the Maemo emulator, to start the Mad Developer
application
\o If you have not deployed an SSH key to protect the connection between
Qt Creator and the Maemo emulator, select \gui {Developer Password} to generate
a password.
\o In Qt Creator, enter the password in the connection settings:
\gui {Tools > Options... > Projects > Maemo Device Configurations}.
\endlist
Test your application on the Maemo emulator as on a device. For a list of
keyboard shortcuts that you can use to emulate Nokia N900 keys and functions, see
\l {Emulating Nokia N900 Keys}.
\section1 Emulating Nokia N900 Keys
The following table summarizes the keyboard shortcuts that you can use
to emulate Nokia N900 keys and functions.
\table
\header
\o Nokia N900 Key
\o Keyboard Shortcut
\row
\o \list
\o Alphabet keys
\o Comma (,)
\o Period (.)
\o Space
\o Arrow keys
\o Enter
\o Backspace
\endlist
\o Respective keys on the development PC keyboard.
\row
\o Shift
\o Left Shift key
\row
\o Ctrl
\o Left Ctrl key
\row
\o Mode
\o Left Alt key
\row
\o Power
\o Esc
\row
\o Keypad slider open and close
\o F1
\row
\o Keypad lock
\o F2
\row
\o Camera lens open and close
\o F3
\row
\o Camera focus
\o F4
\row
\o Camera take picture
\o F5
\note The actual camera functionality is not emulated.
\row
\o Stereo headphones connect and disconnect
\o F6
\row
\o Volume down
\o F7
\row
\o Volume up
\o F8
\row
\o Accelerometer x axis, negative
\o 1
\row
\o Accelerometer x axis, positive
\o 2
\row
\o Accelerometer z axis, negative
\o 4
\row
\o Accelerometer z axis, positive
\o 5
\row
\o Accelerometer y axis, negative
\o 7
\row
\o Accelerometer y axis, positive
\o 8
\endtable
*/
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-developing-maemo.html
\page creator-developing-symbian.html
2010-05-18 15:20:04 +02:00
\nextpage creator-project-managing-sessions.html
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\title Setting Up Development Environment for Symbian
\section1 Hardware and Software Requirements
Windows is the only development platform for the Symbian target
supported at the moment.
2009-10-09 18:47:06 +02:00
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
For deploying and running applications on the device, you need the
following:
\list
\o The Nokia USB drivers that come with \e{PC Suite} or \e{Ovi Suite}
\o The \l{http://tools.ext.nokia.com/trk/}{App TRK} application for
your device
\o The \e{qt_installer.sis} package installed on the device, that is
bundled with the binary Qt distribution
\endlist
To run your applications in the Symbian emulator, you also need
to install Carbide.c++ v2.0.0 or higher.
2009-10-09 18:47:06 +02:00
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\section1 Adding Symbian Platform SDKs
2009-10-09 18:47:06 +02:00
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
Nokia Qt SDK contains all the tools you need for developing Qt applications for
Symbian devices. To use Symbian APIs directly in your applications, you can
install additional Symbian Platform SDKs:
2009-10-09 18:47:06 +02:00
\list
\o \l{http://www.forum.nokia.com/main/resources/tools_and_sdks/S60SDK/}
2010-03-26 13:01:19 +05:30
{S60 Platform SDK 3rd Edition FP1 or higher}.
\o Either the GCCE ARM Toolchain that is included in the S60 Platform
SDKs, or RVCT 2.2 [build 686] or later (which is not available free
of charge)(Your environment needs to find the compiler in the PATH).
\o Qt for Symbian 4.6.2 or later, installed into the S60 SDKs you want
to use.
2009-10-09 18:47:06 +02:00
\endlist
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\section2 Setting Up Qt Creator
2009-10-09 18:47:06 +02:00
2010-03-26 13:01:19 +05:30
When you run Qt Creator after installing the S60 Platform SDK and Qt for
Symbian, the installed SDKs and their corresponding Qt versions are
automatically detected. For each detected S60 SDK with Qt, a special entry
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
is made in the Qt version management settings in \gui{Tools} >
2010-03-26 13:01:19 +05:30
\gui{Options...} > \gui{Qt4} > \gui{Qt Versions}.
2009-10-09 18:47:06 +02:00
2010-03-26 13:01:19 +05:30
\note If you manually add a Qt version for Symbian, you must
also manually specify the S60 SDK to use for this version.
2009-10-09 18:47:06 +02:00
\image qtcreator-qt4-qtversions-win-symbian.png
2010-03-26 13:01:19 +05:30
If you want to run your applications in the Symbian emulator, you need to
point Qt Creator to the Metrowerks Compiler that you want to use, by
setting the \gui{Carbide Directory} of the Qt version to the corresponding
Carbide.c++ installation directory.
2009-10-09 18:47:06 +02:00
You can check what S60 SDKs and corresponding Qt versions are found in the
2010-03-26 13:01:19 +05:30
\gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...} > \gui{Qt4} > \gui{S60 SDKs} preference
page.
2009-10-09 18:47:06 +02:00
\image qtcreator-qt4-s60sdks.png
2010-03-26 18:15:12 +05:30
2009-10-09 18:47:06 +02:00
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\previouspage creator-version-control.html
2010-02-25 14:46:29 +01:00
\page adding-plugins.html
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
\nextpage creator-tips.html
2010-02-25 14:46:29 +01:00
2010-03-01 14:42:51 +01:00
\title Adding Qt Designer Plugins
2010-02-25 14:46:29 +01:00
2010-03-01 14:42:51 +01:00
You can use Qt APIs to create plugins that extend Qt applications.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
This allows you to add your own widgets to \QD.
2010-02-25 14:46:29 +01:00
The most flexible way to include a plugin with an application is to compile it
into a dynamic library that is shipped separately, and detected and loaded at runtime.
The applications can detect plugins that are stored in the standard plugin
2010-03-01 14:42:51 +01:00
subdirectories. For more information on how to create and locate plugins and to
2010-02-25 14:46:29 +01:00
change the default plugin path, see \l{How to Create Qt Plugins}.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
For more information about how to create plugins for \QD, see
2010-05-28 15:12:25 +02:00
\l{http://doc.qt.nokia.com/4.7-snapshot/designer-using-custom-widgets.html}{Creating and Using Components for Qt Designer}.
2010-03-01 14:42:51 +01:00
2010-02-25 14:46:29 +01:00
\section1 Locating Qt Designer Plugins
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
\QD fetches plugins from the standard locations and loads the plugins
that match its build key. \QD is delivered both as a standalone application
2010-03-23 13:16:36 +01:00
and as part of the SDK, where it is integrated into Qt Creator.
2010-03-05 12:50:58 +01:00
The correct folder to place the plugins depends on
2010-02-25 14:46:29 +01:00
which one you use.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
The integrated \QD fetches plugins from the \c {%SDK%\bin\designer} folder on Windows
2010-02-25 14:46:29 +01:00
and Linux and \c {QtCreator.app/Contents/MacOS/designer} folder on Mac. To check which plugins
were loaded successfully and which failed, choose \gui{Tools > Form Editor >
About Qt Designer Plugins}.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
The standalone \QD is part of the Qt library used for building projects,
2010-02-25 14:46:29 +01:00
located under \c {%SDK%\qt}. Therefore, it fetches plugins from the following folder:
\c {%SDK%\qt\plugins\designer}. To check which plugins were loaded successfully and which
failed, choose \gui{Help > About Plugins}.
\section1 Matching Build Keys
The Qt Creator that is included in pre-built SDK packages on Windows is built with the
Microsoft Visual Studio compiler, whereas the version of Qt shipped for building applications
is configured and built to use the MinGW/g++ compiler. Plugins built by using this version of
Qt cannot be loaded by Qt Creator because the build-keys do not match. The plugins can only be
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
used in the standalone version of \QD. Choose \gui{Help > About Qt Creator} to check
2010-02-25 14:46:29 +01:00
the Qt version Qt Creator was built with.
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
To use \QD plugins that were built for the shipped Qt version, make sure that
2010-02-25 14:46:29 +01:00
Qt Creator is built with the same compiler by either recompiling Qt Creator using MinGW or
recompiling Qt with Microsoft Visual Studio, depending on which configuration you want to
use for your applications.
*/
2010-03-18 13:00:02 +01:00
/*!
\contentspage index.html
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\previouspage creator-visual-editor.html
2010-03-18 13:00:02 +01:00
\page creator-usability.html
2010-05-04 12:10:04 +02:00
\nextpage creator-maemo-emulator.html
2010-03-18 13:00:02 +01:00
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\title Optimizing Applications for Mobile Devices
2010-03-18 13:00:02 +01:00
Before starting application development, analyze and define the requirements, scope, and
functionality of the application to ensure efficient functionality and a smooth user
experience. Design the application for a single purpose and analyze how it can best serve
its users. Mobile devices have been designed for use when mobile. Keep the characteristics
of mobile devices in mind when you create applications for them.
The following guidelines help you design and develop usable applications for mobile devices
with varying characteristics, such as screen size and support for input methods:
\list
\o Know your users
Find out who will use the application, what they will use it for,
and which mobile devices they have. Then design the application to fit a specific context
of use.
\o Design for small screens
The screen size of mobile devices is significantly smaller
than that available on desktop devices. Carefully consider what is the most relevant
content to present on the application UI, as it might not be reasonable to try and fit as
much content into the screen as you might have in a desktop application.
\o Design for multiple screen sizes
Relate the position and size of each control to the
dimensions of the display. This enables the same set of information to be presented on the
screen in all resolutions; higher resolution devices just display finer graphics.
\o Design for changing screen orientation
Some devices support screen rotation. On these
devices, applications can be displayed in portrait or landscape orientation. Account for
orientation and dynamically adjust the display when the screen is rotated.
\o Design intuitive ways of moving within applications
Mobile devices lack a mouse and
full-size keyboard, so users must use the touch screen or five way navigation pad to move within
applications. In addition, many users control the devices with one hand. To create an optimized user
experience, allow users to access information with one click; do not make them scroll and type.
\o Design for limited input methods
Applications collect information from users on the task
at hand. In addition to touch screen input, some devices contain physical keys such
as a five way navigation pad, a keypad, and a keyboard. Users enter information by using screen
controls, such as lists, check boxes, radio buttons, and text fields.
\o Keep response times short
Latency can cause delays in user interaction. If users perceive
an application as being slow, they are likely to get frustrated and stop using it.
\o Save battery time
Mobile devices are not constantly connected to a power source but run on
battery power. Optimize power consumption to keep the total consumption at an acceptable
level and to prevent users from running out of battery time.
\o Consider network issues
If users do not have a flat-rate data plan or WLAN support, mobile
network connections cost them money. Also, when users move around with the devices, the networks
available for connections constantly change.
\o Remember the processing limits of the device
The memory available on devices is limited
and you should use it carefully. Although all mobile devices have common functionality,
each device is individual in terms of both the resources available and extra features.
Therefore, you must consider the constraints of all the target devices.
\endlist
For more information about user experience techniques for mobile devices, see the
\l{http://library.forum.nokia.com/topic/Design_and_User_Experience_Library/GUID-A8DF3EB8-E97C-4DA0-95F6-F464ECC995BC_cover.html}{Design and User Experience Library}
on Forum Nokia.
*/
2010-02-25 14:46:29 +01:00
/*!
\contentspage index.html
2010-03-11 14:08:30 +01:00
\previouspage adding-plugins.html
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\page creator-tips.html
\nextpage creator-keyboard-shortcuts.html
2009-05-06 16:22:20 +02:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\title Tips and Tricks
2009-05-06 16:22:20 +02:00
2009-05-13 18:00:54 +02:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section1 Switching between modes
2009-11-23 12:55:07 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
Qt Creator uses different modes for different purposes. You can quickly
switch between these modes with the following keyboard shortcuts:
\list
\o \gui Welcome mode \key Ctrl+1
\o \gui Edit mode \key Ctrl+2
2010-03-23 18:10:17 +05:30
\o \gui Design mode \key Ctrl+3
\o \gui Debug mode \key Ctrl+4
\o \gui Projects mode \key Ctrl+5
\o \gui Help mode \key Ctrl+6
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\endlist
2009-05-13 18:00:54 +02:00
2010-02-25 16:33:38 +05:30
For more information about Qt Creator modes, see \l {Qt Creator Modes}.
2009-05-06 16:22:20 +02:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section1 Moving Between Open Files
2009-11-23 12:55:07 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
To quickly move between currently open files, press
\key Ctrl+Tab.
2009-05-13 18:00:54 +02:00
2009-05-06 16:22:20 +02:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section1 Moving To the Edit Mode
2009-08-03 15:58:12 +02:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
To move to the \gui Edit mode and currently active file, press
\key Esc.
2009-08-03 15:58:12 +02:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
If you already are in the \gui Edit mode:
\list
\o The first press moves focus to the editor
\o The second press closes secondary windows
\endlist
2009-11-23 12:55:07 +01:00
2010-02-25 16:33:38 +05:30
\section1 Using the Filter in Options Dialog
2010-03-24 17:30:47 +05:30
To find specific settings you require in \gui{Tools} > \gui{Options...}
2010-05-07 12:44:05 +02:00
use the filter located at the top left of the \gui Options dialog box.
2010-02-25 16:33:38 +05:30
2009-05-06 16:22:20 +02:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section1 Using Keyboard Shortcuts
2009-11-23 12:55:07 +01:00
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
Qt Creator provides \l{Keyboard Shortcuts}{many useful keyboard shortcuts}.
2009-05-06 16:22:20 +02:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
To customize, import or export keyboard shortcuts, select \gui Tools >
\gui Options... > \gui Environment > \gui Keyboard.
2009-04-01 17:48:05 +02:00
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section1 Running Qt Creator From Command Line
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
You can launch Qt Creator from command line using the name of an
existing session or \c .pro file by giving the name as the command
argument.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
For example, running \tt{qtcreator somesession}, launches Qt Creator and
loads session somesession.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\note Make sure Qt Creator is included in the PATH environment variable.
This can be done by typing the following in the command line:
\code
set PATH=c:\qtsdk\mingw\bin;c:\qtsdk\qt\bin;%PATH%
\endcode
\section1 Showing and Hiding the Sidebar
To toggle the sidebar in the \gui Edit and \gui Debug modes, click
\inlineimage qtcreator-togglebutton.png
or press \key Alt+0 (\key Cmd+0 on Mac OS X).
2010-03-10 12:28:05 +01:00
For more information on using the sidebar, see \l {Browsing Project Contents}.
2010-02-25 16:33:38 +05:30
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section1 Moving To Symbols
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
To move straight to a symbol used in a project, select the symbol in the
\gui Editor toolbar drop-down menu.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
For more information on the editor toolbar,
2010-02-25 16:33:38 +05:30
see \l {Using the Editor Toolbar}.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section1 Displaying Signals and Slots
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
If an instance of a class is derived from QObject, and you would like to
find all other objects connected to one of your object's slots using
Qt's signals and slots mechanism, select \gui Tools > \gui Options...
2010-03-24 17:30:47 +05:30
> \gui{Debugger} > \gui{Debugging Helper} > \gui{Use Debugging Helper}.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2008-12-05 15:24:45 +01:00
In the \gui{Locals and Watchers} view, expand the object's entry and open
the slot in the \e slots subitem. The objects connected to this slot are
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
shown as children of the slot. This method works with signals too.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section1 Displaying Low Level Data
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2009-03-30 14:25:06 +02:00
If special debugging of Qt objects fails due to data corruption within the
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
debugged objects, you can switch off the debugging helpers. When debugging
helpers are switched off low-level structures become visible.
To switch off the debugging helpers:
\list 1
\o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Debugger >
\gui{Debugging Helper}.
2010-05-14 15:45:43 +02:00
\o Uncheck the \gui{Use Debugging Helper} checkbox.
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\endlist
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
*/
2008-12-15 15:59:45 +01:00
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
/*!
\contentspage index.html
\previouspage creator-tips.html
\page creator-keyboard-shortcuts.html
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\nextpage creator-known-issues.html
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\title Keyboard Shortcuts
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
Qt Creator provides various keyboard shortcuts to speed up your development
process.
\section1 Configuring Keyboard Shortcuts
To customize a keyboard shortcut:
\list 1
2010-05-07 12:44:05 +02:00
\o Select \gui Tools > \gui Options... > \gui Environment >
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\gui Keyboard.
\o Select an action from the list.
\o In \gui{Key Sequence} enter the shortcut key you want to associate
with the selected action.
\endlist
Qt Creator allows you to use different keyboard shortcut mapping schemes:
\list
\o To import a keyboard shortcut mapping scheme, click \gui Import
and select the kms file containing keyboard shortcut mapping scheme
you want to import.
\o To export the current keyboard shortcut mapping scheme, click
\gui Export and select the location where you want to save the
exported kms file.
\endlist
\section1 Default Keyboard Shortcuts
The following tables list the default keyboard shortcuts. They are
categorized by actions.
\section2 General Keyboard Shortcuts
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\table
\header
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Action
\o Keyboard shortcut
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Open file or project
\o Ctrl+O
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o New file or project
\o Ctrl+N
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Open in external editor
\o Alt+V, Alt+I
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Cut
\o Ctrl+X
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Copy
\o Ctrl+C
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Paste
\o Ctrl+V
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Redo
\o Ctrl+Y
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Save
\o Ctrl+S
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Save all
\o Ctrl+A
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Close window
\o Ctrl+W
2009-05-06 17:09:27 +02:00
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Close all
\o Ctrl+Shift+W
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Go back
\o Alt+Left
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Go forward
\o Alt+Right
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Go to line
\o Ctrl+L
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Next open document in history
\o Ctrl+Shift+Tab
\row
\o Goto other split
\o Ctrl+E, O
\row
\o Previous open document in history
\o Ctrl+Tab
\row
\o Activate \gui Locator
\o Ctrl+K
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Switch to \gui Welcome mode
\o Ctrl+1
\row
\o Switch to \gui Edit mode
\o Ctrl+2
\row
2010-03-18 13:00:02 +01:00
\o Switch to \gui Design mode
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Ctrl+3
\row
2010-03-18 13:00:02 +01:00
\o Switch to \gui Debug mode
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Ctrl+4
\row
2010-03-18 13:00:02 +01:00
\o Switch to \gui Projects mode
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Ctrl+5
\row
2010-03-18 13:00:02 +01:00
\o Switch to \gui Help mode
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Ctrl+6
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\row
2008-12-12 21:50:29 +01:00
\o Toggle \gui{Build Issues} pane
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Alt+1 (Cmd+1 on Mac OS X)
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\row
2008-12-12 21:50:29 +01:00
\o Toggle \gui{Search Results} pane
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Alt+2 (Cmd+2 on Mac OS X)
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\row
2008-12-12 22:05:38 +01:00
\o Toggle \gui{Application Output} pane
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Alt+3 (Cmd+3 on Mac OS X)
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\row
2008-12-12 21:50:29 +01:00
\o Toggle \gui{Compile Output} pane
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Alt+4 (Cmd+4 on Mac OS X)
\row
\o Activate \gui Bookmarks pane
\o Alt+M
\row
\o Activate \gui{File System} pane
\o Alt+Y
\row
\o Activate \gui{Open Documents} pane
\o Alt+O
\row
\o Activate \gui Projects pane
\o Alt+X
\row
\o Full screen
\o Ctrl+Shift+F11
\row
\o Toggle the sidebar
\o Alt+0 (Cmd+0 on Mac OS X)
\row
\o Undo
\o Ctrl+Z
\row
\o Move to \gui Edit mode
In \gui Edit mode:
\list
\o The first press moves focus to the editor
\o The second press closes secondary windows
\endlist
\o Esc
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\endtable
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section2 Editing Keyboard Shortcuts
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\table
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\header
\o Action
\o Keyboard shortcut
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Auto-indent selection
\o Ctrl+I
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Collapse
\o Ctrl+<
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Expand
\o Ctrl+>
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Trigger a completion in this scope
\o Ctrl+Space
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Copy line down
\o Ctrl+Alt+Down
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Copy line up
\o Ctrl+Alt+Up
\row
\o Cut line
\o Shift+Del
2010-05-18 15:20:04 +02:00
\row
\o Join lines
\o Ctrl+J
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Decrease font size
\o Ctrl+- (Ctrl+Roll mouse wheel down)
\row
\o Increase font size
\o Ctrl++ (Ctrl+Roll mouse wheel up)
\row
2010-05-18 15:20:04 +02:00
\o Toggle Vim-style editing
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Alt+V, Alt+V
\row
\o Split
\o Ctrl+E, 2
\row
\o Split side by side
\o Ctrl+E, 3
\row
\o Remove all splits
\o Ctrl+E, 1
\row
\o Remove current split
\o Ctrl+E, 0
\row
\o Select all
\o Ctrl+A
\row
\o Go to block end
\o Ctrl+]
\row
\o Go to block start
\o Ctrl+[
\row
\o Go to block end with selection
\o Ctrl+}
\row
\o Go to block start with selection
\o Ctrl+{
\row
\o Move current line down
\o Ctrl+Shift+Down
\row
\o Move current line up
\o Ctrl+Shift+Up
\row
\o Trigger a quick fix in this scope
\o Alt+Return
\row
\o Rewrap paragraph
\o Ctrl+E, R
\row
\o Select the current block
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
The second press extends the selection to the parent block
\o Ctrl+U
\row
\o Enable text wrapping
\o Ctrl+E, Ctrl+W
\row
\o Toggle comment for selection
\o Ctrl+/
\row
\o Visualize whitespace
\o Ctrl+E, Ctrl+V
\row
\o Delete
\o Del
\row
\o Adjust size
\o Ctrl+J
\row
\o Lay out in a grid
\o Ctrl+G
\row
\o Lay out horizontally
\o Ctrl+H
\row
\o Lay out vertically
\o Ctrl+L
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Preview
\o Ctrl+Alt+R
\row
\o Edit signals and slots
\o F4
\row
\o Edit widgets
\o F3
\row
\o Toggle bookmark
\o Ctrl+M
\row
\o Go to next bookmark
\o Ctrl+.
\row
\o Go to previous bookmark
\o Ctrl+,
\row
\o Fetch snippet
\o Alt+C, Alt+F
\row
\o Paste snippet
\o Alt+C, Alt+P
\row
\o Find usages
\o Ctrl+Shift+U
\row
\o Follow symbol under cursor
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
Works with namespaces, classes, methods, variables, include
statements and macros
\o F2
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Rename symbol under cursor
\o Ctrl+Shift+R
\row
\o Switch between method declaration and definition
\o Shift+F2
\row
\o Switch between header and source file
\o F4
\endtable
\section2 Debugging Keyboard Shortcuts
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\table
\header
\o Action
\o Keyboard shortcut
\row
\o Start debugging
\o F5
\row
\o Stop or interrupt debugger
\o Shift+F5
\row
\o Reset debugger
\o Ctrl+Shift+F5
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Step over
\o F10
\row
\o Step into
\o F11
\row
\o Step out
\o Shift+F11
\row
\o Toggle breakpoint
\o F9
\endtable
\section2 Project Keyboard Shortcuts
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\table
\header
\o Action
\o Keyboard shortcut
\row
\o Build project
\o Ctrl+B
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\row
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\o Build all
\o Ctrl+Shift+B
\row
\o New project
\o Ctrl+Shift+N
\row
\o Run
\o Ctrl+R
\endtable
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section2 Help Keyboard Shortcuts
\table
\header
\o Action
\o Keyboard shortcut
\row
\o View context-sensitive help
\o F1
\row
\o Activate contents in \gui Help mode
\o Ctrl+T
\row
\o Add bookmark in \gui Help mode
\o Ctrl+M
\row
\o Activate index in \gui Help mode
\o Ctrl+I
\row
\o Reset font size in \gui Help mode
\o Ctrl+0
\row
\o Activate search in \gui Help mode
\o Ctrl+S
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\endtable
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\section2 Version Control Keyboard Shortcuts
\table
\header
2010-03-04 12:42:14 +05:30
\o {1,2} Action
2010-03-23 14:46:45 +05:30
\o {5,1} Version control system
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\header
\o CVS
\o Git
\o Perforce
\o Subversion
2010-03-23 14:46:45 +05:30
\o Mercurial
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\row
\o Add
\o Alt+C, Alt+A
\o Alt+G, Alt+A
\o
\o Alt+S, Alt+A
2010-03-23 14:46:45 +05:30
\o
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\row
\o Commit
\o Alt+C, Alt+C
\o Alt+G, Alt+C
\o
\o
2010-03-23 14:46:45 +05:30
\o Alt+H, Alt+C
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\row
\o Diff
\o Alt+C, Alt+D
\o Alt+G, Alt+D
\o
\o Alt+S, Alt+D
2010-03-23 14:46:45 +05:30
\o Alt+H, Alt+D
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\row
\o Diff project
\o
\o Alt+G, Alt+Shift+D
\o Alt+P, Alt+D
\o
2010-03-23 14:46:45 +05:30
\o
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\row
\o Blame
\o
\o Alt+G, Alt+B
\o
\o
2010-03-23 14:46:45 +05:30
\o
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\row
\o Log
\o
\o Alt+G, Alt+L
\o Alt+P, Alt+F
\o
2010-03-23 14:46:45 +05:30
\o Alt+H, Alt+L
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\row
\o Log project
\o
\o Alt+G, Alt+K
\o
\o
2010-03-23 14:46:45 +05:30
\o
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\row
\o Status
\o
\o Alt+G, Alt+S
\o
\o
2010-03-23 14:46:45 +05:30
\o Alt+H, Alt+S
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\row
\o Undo changes
\o
\o Alt+G, Alt+U
\o
\o
2010-03-23 14:46:45 +05:30
\o
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\row
\o Diff project
\o
\o Alt+G, Alt+Shift+D
\o Alt+P, Alt+D
\o
2010-03-23 14:46:45 +05:30
\o
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\row
\o Edit
\o
\o
\o Alt+P, Alt+E
\o
2010-03-23 14:46:45 +05:30
\o
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\row
\o Opened
\o
\o
\o Alt+P, Alt+O
\o
2010-03-23 14:46:45 +05:30
\o
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\row
\o Revert
\o
\o
\o Alt+P, Alt+R
\o
2010-03-23 14:46:45 +05:30
\o
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\row
\o Submit
\o
\o
\o Alt+P, Alt+S
\o
2010-03-23 14:46:45 +05:30
\o
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\endtable
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
*/
2008-12-15 15:59:45 +01:00
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
/*!
\contentspage index.html
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\previouspage creator-known-issues.html
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
\page creator-glossary.html
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\nextpage creator-acknowledgements.html
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
\title Glossary
\table
\header
\o Term
\o Meaning
\row
\o
\raw HTML
2009-11-12 18:42:08 +01:00
Qt in PATH
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
\endraw
\target glossary-system-qt
2009-11-12 18:42:08 +01:00
\o This is the Qt
version for the \c qmake command found in your \c PATH
2009-11-23 12:55:07 +01:00
environment variable.
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
This is likely to be the system's Qt version.
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
\row
\o
\raw HTML
Project Qt
\endraw
\target glossary-project-qt
2010-04-22 16:14:34 +02:00
\o The version of Qt configured in the \gui{Projects} mode, \gui {Build
Settings}, \gui {Qt Version} field. This is the Qt version that
is actually used by a particular project.
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
\row
\o
\raw HTML
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
Shadow build
2009-02-27 11:59:45 +01:00
\endraw
\target glossary-shadow-build
\o Shadow building means building a project in a separate
directory, the \e{build directory}. The build directory is
different from the source directory. One of the benefits of
shadow building is that it keeps your source directory clean.
Shadow building is the best practice if you need many build
configurations for a single set of source.
\endtable
*/
/*!
\contentspage index.html
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\previouspage creator-keyboard-shortcuts.html
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\page creator-known-issues.html
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\nextpage creator-glossary.html
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2009-05-28 15:48:16 +02:00
\title Known Issues
There are some known issues with Qt Creator.
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
The development team is aware of them, there is no need to report them as bugs.
2009-05-28 15:48:16 +02:00
2010-03-31 18:06:02 +02:00
\section1 Known Issues of Version 1.3.84
2009-05-28 15:31:12 +02:00
2009-10-09 17:44:43 +02:00
\list
2010-04-09 12:50:52 +02:00
\o On Windows, debugging a MinGW-built console application (with \gui{Run in terminal}
checked) using gdb does not work due to a bug in gdb related to attaching to
stopped processes (see \l{http://bugreports.qt.nokia.com/browse/QTCREATORBUG-1020}).
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\o Debugging Helper does not work while performing On-Device Debugging.
2009-10-09 17:44:43 +02:00
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\o QML Preview (Run Project) only works if built against Qt with
2009-10-09 17:44:43 +02:00
Declarative UI.
\o Setting breakpoints in code that is compiled into the binary more
than once does not work.
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\o On Linux and Windows, installing Qt with one user account and
2009-11-02 18:27:39 +01:00
then using it with another requires other users to manually set
the Qt version. On Windows, setting the MinGW location is
required as well. The same applies to the location of GDB for Symbian.
A workaround is to copy %APPDATA%/Nokia/qtcreator.ini (Windows) or
$HOME/.config/Nokia/QtCreator.ini (Linux) from the directory
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
of the user who installed Qt Creator to the other user.
This issue does not exist on Mac OS X.
2009-11-02 18:27:39 +01:00
\endlist
2009-10-09 17:44:43 +02:00
\section1 Known Issues of Version 1.2.0 and 1.2.1
2009-05-28 15:31:12 +02:00
\list
2009-05-28 15:48:16 +02:00
\o Gdb on Windows may not work if the 'Embassy \reg Security Center' software
by 'Wave \reg Systems' is installed and active (causing crashes in \c{vxvault.dll)}).
2009-06-17 15:59:32 +02:00
2009-05-28 15:48:16 +02:00
\o Only simple data types (POD) work in the Watch Window of CDB.
2009-06-17 15:59:32 +02:00
\o Qt Creator uses SQLite for storing some of its settings. SQLite is
known to have problems with certain NFS servers (most notably the
nfs-user-server 2.2beta), since they can lock up the application
when it tries to lock the database. If your home directory is on an
NFS share and you encounter this issue, one option would be to
switch to the nfs-kernel-server, or create a symlink so that the
settings are stored locally.
2009-05-28 15:31:12 +02:00
\endlist
2009-05-28 15:48:16 +02:00
\section1 Known Issues of Version 1.1.0
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\list
2009-02-03 15:41:03 +01:00
\o Paths or file names containing spaces or special characters, e.g.,
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
colons, dollar signs, hash marks etc. may cause problems. This
2009-02-03 15:41:03 +01:00
is because some of the tools Qt Creator uses in the background have
restrictions on the characters allowed in file and directory names.
2009-02-04 14:15:13 +01:00
To be on the safe side, we recommend creating projects and project
2009-02-03 15:41:03 +01:00
items with names consisting of plain characters, numbers,
underscores, and hyphens.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2009-02-03 15:41:03 +01:00
\o \c{.pro} files are reformatted if files have been added or removed.
Whitespace is not preserved.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2009-02-03 15:41:03 +01:00
\o There is no IDE support for adding files to include (\c .pri) files.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2009-02-03 15:41:03 +01:00
\o There is no IDE support for adding/removing sub-projects. Project
hierarchies (SUBDIRS template) have to be created manually.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2009-02-03 15:41:03 +01:00
\o The file system sidebar does not update automatically. As a
workaround, switch to another directory and then back.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
2009-02-03 15:41:03 +01:00
\o Loading KDE4 designer plugins breaks the style in KDE < 4.2.1
due to a bug in KDE.
2008-12-17 16:33:42 +01:00
2009-04-16 17:01:25 +02:00
\o The DEFINES and INCLUDES set in \c{.pro} files are not dealt with
on a file-specific level. Because of this, handling of DEFINES has
been disabled completely. Also the \c{.qmake.cache} is not being
parsed. In general, the \c{.pro} file parser is incomplete and
problems are still to be expected.
2008-12-17 16:33:42 +01:00
2009-02-03 15:41:03 +01:00
\o Code completion for generated UI header files is updated only
after a build.
\o Code completion does not support typedefs for nested classes.
\o There is a kernel bug essentially making debugging unreliable on
2.6.24 kernels for i386 (which is, unfortunately, the default on
Ubuntu 8.04). See
\l{https://bugs.launchpad.net/ubuntu/+source/gdb/+bug/230315/} for
details. The only solution to this problem is to boot another
kernel.
2009-02-27 10:32:10 +01:00
2009-02-03 15:41:03 +01:00
\o Gdb may take long to load debugging symbols, especially from large
libraries like \c libQtWebKit. Starting the debugging module can
take up to several minutes without visible progress.
2008-12-17 16:33:42 +01:00
2009-02-03 15:41:03 +01:00
\o Setting breakpoints in files that do not have unique absolute
paths may fail. For example, remounting parts of a file system
using the --bind mount option.
2008-12-17 16:33:42 +01:00
2009-04-01 17:48:05 +02:00
\o There is no syntax highlighting for \c CMake project files.
2009-04-01 14:43:41 +02:00
\o Project files included from \c{CMakeLists.txt} are not shown in the
navigation tree.
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\o Using the Visual Studio Compiler with \c CMake is not supported.
2009-04-01 14:43:41 +02:00
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
\o Creating new \c CMake projects with Qt Creator is not supported.
2009-04-01 14:43:41 +02:00
2009-04-01 17:48:05 +02:00
\o Having more than one build directory for \c CMake is not supported.
2009-04-01 14:43:41 +02:00
2009-04-01 17:48:05 +02:00
\o Changing the build directory for \c CMake after the initial import
is disabled.
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
\endlist
2009-11-23 18:03:15 +01:00
2008-12-02 12:01:29 +01:00
*/
2009-03-31 17:48:14 +02:00
2009-02-27 10:32:10 +01:00
/*!
\contentspage index.html
2010-02-23 16:53:00 +01:00
\previouspage creator-glossary.html
2009-02-27 10:32:10 +01:00
\page creator-acknowledgements.html
\title Acknowledgements
\section1 Third-party Components
Qt Creator contains the following third-party components:
\list
\o \bold{Open Source front-end for C++ (license MIT)}, enhanced for use in
2009-02-27 12:00:39 +01:00
Qt Creator.\br
Roberto Raggi <roberto.raggi@gmail.com>\br
2010-01-13 12:30:31 +01:00
QtCreator/src/shared/cplusplus\br\br
\o \bold{Botan, a C++ crypto library. Version 1.8.8}\br
\list
\o Copyright (C) 1999-2004 The Botan Project. All rights reserved.
\o Copyright (C) 1999-2009 Jack Lloyd
\o 2001 Peter J Jones
\o 2004-2007 Justin Karneges
\o 2005 Matthew Gregan
\o 2005-2006 Matt Johnston
\o 2006 Luca Piccarreta
\o 2007 Yves Jerschow
\o 2007-2008 FlexSecure GmbH
\o 2007-2008 Technische Universitat Darmstadt
\o 2007-2008 Falko Strenzke
\o 2007-2008 Martin Doering
\o 2007 Manuel Hartl
\o 2007 Christoph Ludwig
\o 2007 Patrick Sona
\endlist
All rights reserved.\br\br
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
met:\br\br
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer.\br\br
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.\br
\br
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR(S) "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR(S) OR CONTRIBUTOR(S) BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.\br\br
2010-01-20 12:14:28 +01:00
The source code of Botan C++ crypto library can be found
here:
\list
\o QtCreator/src/libs/3rdparty
\o \l{http://qt.gitorious.org/qt-creator/qt-creator/trees/master/src/libs/3rdparty}
\endlist
\br\br
2010-01-13 12:30:31 +01:00
\o \bold{NetSieben SSH Library is a Secure Shell client library for C++.
Version 1.3.2}\br
\list
\o \bold{Commercial License:} For organizations who do not want to
release the source code for their applications as open source/
free software; in other words they do not want to comply with the
GNU General Public License (GPL) or Q Public License.
\o \bold{Non Commercial / Open Source License:} NetSieben believes in
contributing back to the open source community, thus it has released
the SSH Library under Q Public License as it is defined by Trolltech
AS of Norway. The Open Source License allows the user to use software
under an open source / free software license, and distribute it
freely. The software can be used at no charge with the condition
that if the user uses the SSH Library in an application they wish to
redistribute, then the complete source code for your application must
be available and freely redistributable under reasonable conditions.
2010-01-29 22:49:55 +01:00
For more information on the used QPL License see:
2010-01-13 12:30:31 +01:00
QtCreator/src/libs/3rdparty/net7ssh/LICENSE.QPL
2010-01-20 12:14:28 +01:00
\endlist\br\br
The source code of NetSieben Secure Shell C++ Library can be found
here:
\list
\o QtCreator/src/libs/3rdparty
\o \l{http://qt.gitorious.org/qt-creator/qt-creator/trees/master/src/libs/3rdparty}
2010-01-13 12:30:31 +01:00
\endlist
\endlist
2009-02-27 10:32:10 +01:00
*/